JP7219471B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a game results in a predetermined special result, a display device and effect control means for controlling the effect of the display device are provided. The effect control means is capable of displaying on the display device a variable display effect of performing variable display and stop display of a plurality of identification symbols, and the identification symbols include at least identification information and a character. machine is known (see, for example, US Pat.

JP 2018-158036 A

By the way, in the conventional game machine, although the game progresses with the identification information and characters fluctuating, the game does not progress smoothly, and the interest in the game is not increased.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-described problems and to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of interest in games.

According to the first aspect of the invention, a first variable display means capable of variable display of the first variable display game;
a second variable display means capable of variable display of the second variable display game;
game control means for controlling the first variable display means and the second variable display means;
display means capable of displaying a decorative game that variably displays identification information corresponding to the first variable display game or the second variable display game;
A production control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The production control means is
performing a first effect and a second effect for hiding the first element on the display means at a first timing in the decoration game;
At a second timing after the first timing in the decoration game, performing a third effect for re-displaying the first component that has been hidden on the display means,
performing a fourth effect different from the second effect for hiding the first element on the display means at a third timing during reach after the second timing in the decoration game;
In the fourth effect, the identification information is made invisible with a first predetermined image covering the entirety of the identification information, and then the identification is made with a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image while maintaining the invisible state. covering the whole of information,
Next, after the identification information with the first component hidden is once made visible, the entire identification information is covered with a third predetermined image different from the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image, and the After making the identification information invisible again and hiding the third predetermined image, it is possible to develop the reach,
When executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game,
The game control means starts the variable display of the second variable display game, and the effect control means starts the variable display of the decoration game corresponding to the second variable display game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of interest in games.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as viewed from the front side; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a figure which shows the specific example of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the specific example of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the specific example of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the modification of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the modification of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the modification of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the specific example of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the specific example of production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of production|presentation control.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention as applied to a pachinko machine will now be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Configuration of Front Side of Game Machine First, the overall configuration of the game machine 1 of this example will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this example, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12
is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Under the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a ball shooting device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 are placed. An upper tray ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for the outflow. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a drive source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the production button 2
It has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating 5. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). can be

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, the front frame 12
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the.

On the right side of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to flow down the game balls in the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. do. Also, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29,
In the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 3), an effect or the like can be performed in which the player's operation is intervened.

B. Front Configuration of Game Board Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 8 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0 is provided. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.
A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. The board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.
Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal solenoid 37
Although it is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by moving forward and backward (slides) by c, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "H" by the general electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of ".
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (not shown) that advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction.
By doing so, the upper big winning hole is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. First special variable winning device 3
8, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the upper large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper large winning opening, the player is given a predetermined A game value (prize ball) is provided. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 5) is provided with a lever member actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. Occurs (in this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Also, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
At 9, an opening/closing member (not shown) advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction, thereby converting the lower big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided. In addition, the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32
In the lower right corner of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
And a collective display device 50 is provided for executing the normal pattern variation display game.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 indicator for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). This game state display section 56
, the first game state display unit 56a (C6) that informs the player of the advantageous hitting method (playing method corresponding to the game state) between left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting, time saving state (variation time shortening) A second game state display portion 56b (C7) for notifying that the function is activated), and a third game state display portion for notifying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. 56c
(D7) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 is a general figure display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the general figure fluctuation display game
, and a normal pattern holding indicator 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 is the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, and A7 are lit (the LED lamp A
0, A2, A4, and A6 are extinguished) alternately to indicate that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52 is the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, and B7 are lit (the LED lamp B
0, B2, B4, and B6 are extinguished states) are alternately switched to indicate that they are fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending display device 53 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 pending display device 54 is the normal fluctuation winning device 3 that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls to 7 (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. Display by
The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

When the round display unit 55 is not in the special game state, all the LEDs (LED lamp D
0 to D3) are turned off, and during the special game state, LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the result, as shown in FIG. The round display section 55 may be configured with a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a displays an LED (LED lamp C6
) is turned off, and when the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED (LED lamp C7) when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED (LED lamp D7) when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the power is not in the high probability state. Turn off.

The general pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 57 is, during the fluctuation display of the general pattern fluctuation display game,
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(g), by alternately changing the pattern number for variation, alternately switching between a mode in which the LED lamp D5 is lit and a mode in which the LED lamps D4 and D6 are lit. Display that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example.
If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate the hit, and if the result is "miss", a plurality of LEs
Any one of D (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of undigested balls (normal pattern starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57. For example, FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

C. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. In the drawings and the following description, "SW" means a switch. In addition, when the name of a member is long, it becomes difficult to illustrate it in the drawing, so it may be written (illustrated) with a shortened name as appropriate.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 and a payout control device 20 as main components of a control system.
0, an effect control device 300, a firing control device (not shown), and a power supply device 400 are provided.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 and devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the game machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .
The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC power supply that generates a DC voltage of 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a game microcomputer 1
Backup power supply unit 4 that supplies power supply voltage to RAM 111C inside 11 at the time of power failure
20, and a control signal generation unit 430 that has a power failure monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM 111C), and the data stored in the RAM 111C is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 generates, for example, 32 signals generated by the normal power supply unit 410
When the voltage of V drops below, for example, 17 V, the occurrence of a power failure is detected, the power failure monitor signal is changed, and a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.
The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing An interface chip that is connected to an out-ball detection switch 32a to be detected, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. (Proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 3
4 a is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
A detection signal of a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and a detection signal of a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.
Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
It is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, press R while turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (depressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is entered, in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated ( ), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and role ratio are displayed.

Also, the state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
2 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used.
The set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a)
, is also supplied to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through the relay board 70 . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .
As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are once captured by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the internal lever member and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value This is a port for output.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V, the fifth driver 138e has D as a power supply voltage.
C5V is supplied from power supply 400 .
Also, the second driver 138b for driving the segment lines of the batch display device 50 has DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and
It instructs the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructs the reproduction sound to the sound source LSI 314, turns on the decoration lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, and manages the presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.
Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc.
The function of detecting the on / off state of and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sending the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 is provided that has an input function.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC when using a low voltage LSI such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration for performing the above control, it is configured to perform the following control.
(A) That is, the effect control device 300 controls the display device 41 to variably display the identification information. and a first period during which the character part (first component) is hidden at the start of variation of the identification information (first timing) (character part (first component) of the identification information
Control is performed so that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display.
The first period is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information. , the expression "non-display effect period" is also used as appropriate. Moreover, in the description regarding the effect, the expression "non-display effect" is also used. For example, for the start and end of the first period, the expressions "start of non-display effect" and "end of non-display effect" are also used.
Such control may be performed by setting the first period to be a period during which it can be recognized that the character portion (first component) has completely disappeared.
In this case, when the identification information starts to change (first timing), only the character portion (the first component) rotates and disappears, and then the character portion disappears completely. In some cases, control is performed so that the numeric portion (second component) is enlarged and displayed within the screen.
In general, the term "character" refers to a character or personality, or a character who has a character or personality,
It means an animated person, animal, etc.

(B) In addition, the production control device 300 is configured to include a character part (first component) and a number part (second component) as another control, and when the identification information develops into a reach production or when it becomes super reach (second timing), the character part (
Control is performed so that there is a second period during which the first component) is not displayed (a non-display transition rendering period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information).
It should be noted that such control may be performed by setting the second period to be a period in which it can be recognized that the character portion (first component) has completely disappeared.
In addition, the production control device 300 displays a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching) so as to overlap the character part (first component) when developing into the reach production of the identification information or when it becomes super reach (second timing). It is also possible to perform control such that the character portion (the first component) is instantly hidden after being displayed on the screen of the display device 41 .
In addition, in the above, the first period may be shorter than the second period.
The period may be longer than the second period, or the first period and the second period may be the same, which are appropriately set according to the game situation.
A specific example of the above control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29 and later.

Here, the inventive concept of the above (A) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The control means is
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that there is a first period during which a first component is not displayed on display means at a first timing.
In addition, the inventive concept combining the above (A) and (B) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The control means is
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
At the first timing, there is a first period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that there is a second period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means at the second timing.
The effect control device 300 corresponds to effect control means for controlling the display device 41 (effect display means), and the display device 41 corresponds to effect display means. has the function of control means for controlling the display device 41, and the display device 41 has the function of display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays the identification information.
Also, the special figure variation display game of the present embodiment (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished) corresponds to the variation display game of the concept of the invention.

D. Overview of the Game In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. Alternatively, it may simply be called a variable display game.
In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from the ball shooting device. The launched game ball is in the game area 3
2 flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places, normal figure start gate 34, general prize opening 35, start prize opening 36, normal variable prize winning the device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39,
It flows into an out port 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning Players can aim to win prizes in the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general prize winning port 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal map start memory in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 57 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
The normal map display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the state of the result of the loss on the normal pattern display device 57 .

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second start memory forming a start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111C as first start memory and second start memory. And, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and in the display device 41 of the center case 40 Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) special figure 1 variable display game ( 1st special figure fluctuation display game) execution control, and special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning area) It constitutes execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means changes the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. are configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole 36 . In addition, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible to do That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the special figure variation display game as described above (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished), the following special figure variation A display game is played.
That is, at the start of the variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game (first timing), the character part (first component) is hidden during the first period (display of the character part (first component) of the identification information Control is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from to non-display.
Specifically, when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), only the character portion (first component) rotates, and eventually the character portion disappears, so that the character portion is not displayed (display device). 41), and then when the character part is completely hidden, the number part (second component) is enlarged and displayed in the screen (at this point the character part is completed) is performed.
In this case, when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), the character part (first component) starts to display non-display effects, and the number part (second component) expands in the screen as described above. The point of time when it is displayed is the point of time when the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is completed.
This emphasizes the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate.
The enlarged number portion then fluctuates rapidly. After that, it will either go out or develop into a reach production.

In addition, as another game, when the identification information develops into a reach effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), the character portion (first component) is hidden during a second period (identification information character Control is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the portion (first component).
Specifically, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (second
At the timing), an effect is performed in which the character portion (first component) explodes, and the number portion (second component) expands within the screen.
Enlargement of the number portion (second component) will emphasize that it will be super reach or reach.
Next, an effect is performed in which the wreckage of the exploded character portion (first component) is deleted from the screen, and the enlarged number portion is reduced to the corners of the screen (for example, both upper corners of the screen).
A production that moves to is performed.
Next, on the screen, an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining or suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is started. At this point, the non-display rendering of the character portion is completed. After that, it either hits the jackpot or loses.

In addition, as other game effects, a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching) is displayed so as to overlap the character portion (first component) when developing into a reach effect of identification information or when becoming a super reach (second timing). is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 and the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden.
Specifically, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (second
timing), an eye catch as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to completely overlap the character portion (first component), and the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden. An effect is performed in which the number portion (second component) becomes smaller and moves to the corners of the screen (for example, both upper corners of the screen).

In addition, as described above, when the identification information develops into a reach effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), an eye catch as a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap the character portion (first component). The character portion (the first
component) is hidden, but the eye-catching image is the character part (first
component), control is performed to overlap either the front side or the back side of the image of the character portion (first component).
For example, it is preferable to hide the character portion while the eye-catching image is superimposed on the front side to hide the character portion. Control may be performed to produce an effect that makes the displayed state difficult to see.

Next, the screen shifts to the start of an effect (for example, a battle effect) that determines or suggests whether the game is a big hit or not. At this point, hiding the character portion is completed. After that, it either hits the jackpot or loses.
In this case, when the ready-to-win effect develops or when the super-reach effect occurs (second timing), at the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component), the eye-catching is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as described above. The time point when the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden after being displayed is the time when the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is completed.
This will emphasize the development of reach performance and the super reach.
A specific example of the above game will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29 and later.

E. Operation of Control System Hereinafter, the control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described. First, the game control device 10
0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (eg 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the D register) is set to the upper address of the RAM top address (step S4)
. In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step S6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step S7) is performed. In the process of step S7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 acting as main control means
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) to start normally according to the instructions from 00
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step S8). wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step S8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set to be checked, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps S34 and S54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step S8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S9), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (step S10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step S10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S10; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired,
Access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step S14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A has a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that triggers random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step S15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg, 5Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
(step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step S18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step S20), and the process proceeds to step S21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step S19; N), step Based on the state read in S6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step S21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step S22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step S22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step S22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step S23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step S23; Y), a command of main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. In other words, if the gaming machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step S24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step S25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
A display as shown in FIG. 41(h) is performed. After that, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step S26).
, the process returns to step S25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step S21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step S27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step S27
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step S29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1
The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by means of voice output from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step S27; Y), processing for clearing the probability set value (step S28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, step S29,
After performing the process of S30, the process proceeds to step S31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step S21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step S22; N and step S23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step S6 (step S35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step S35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step S6 (step S43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step S43; N)
In other words, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step S41 to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S43
;Y), the process proceeds to step S44 to perform the initialization process. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is ON (step S35; Y), the probability setting confirming flag is set (step S36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the production control board (production control device 300) for the command during probability setting confirmation
(step S37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
It notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

A value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 ms or more (step S31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step S122) of the timer interrupt process when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step S120). Therefore, 12
When the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step S120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step S31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, at least 5
Since it is necessary to output the security signal during 0 ms, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step S32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step S33). In step S33, determination is not made based on the state read in step S6 (state when power is turned on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step S103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). decision based on If it is determined in step S33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step S33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step S34), and if no power failure has occurred (step S34;
N), the process returns to step S33, and when a power failure has occurred (step S34; Y), the process proceeds to step S55. When it is determined in step S34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step S23 of the main processing (FIGS. 7 and 8) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step S33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step S38) is performed. Processing for permitting interrupts (step S32
) and before the interrupt prohibiting process (steps S38 and S55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step S122), which is a process related to the probability setting value.
is done. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command,
The notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step S40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step S40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set is the area to be initialized (for example, the blackout inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step S41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error/unauthorized monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared in step S41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S42), and the process proceeds to step S47. In the case of this embodiment, in step S42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step S40; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting values are cleared to 0 (step S44). In step S44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area (work area and stack area) for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) are cleared. Instead, 0 clear the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area). Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step S44. In addition, in step S44,
The stack area and unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S45).
. The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S46). In the case of this embodiment, in step S46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
A support frequency information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the performance frequency information command and the general electric support, is also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random numbers to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), R
After saving in a predetermined area of WM (step S48), interrupt is permitted (step S4
9). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generating circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1
, or random update in which all the values within the range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process of step S50, the process of prohibiting interrupts (step S51)
to perform performance display editing processing (step S52). Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step S53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step S54). (Step S5
0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step S49) before the initial value random number update process (step S50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S50 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step S54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step S55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S57
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step S60), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S61), it waits until the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals.
When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step S104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step S104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation process (step S122)
to terminate the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step S104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37
Output processing (step S105) for performing drive control of actuators such as c) is performed. When a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step S107),
Random number update processing 2 (step S108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step S109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step S110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step S110; N), the special game process (step S112) for performing the processing related to the special figure variation display game, the normal figure game processing (step S112) for performing the processing relating to the normal figure variation display game S114) is performed, and the segment LED editing process (step S115) is performed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content. conduct.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring process (step S117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step S118) of checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and determination of whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step S119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step S120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step S121) for controlling the performance display device 153, and timer interrupt processing are completed. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. Next, in the explanation of the flowchart relating to the special game process, "step A" will be used as the step number.
In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening
7. When there is a prize for a game ball, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the prize. make a judgment.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls is monitored by the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Big prize mouth switch 39a
Performs processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special game processing timer is "
0" (step A5; Y), i.e., if the time has expired or has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. (step A6), and acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game process number using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A
10).

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win. Special figure display process (step A11
)I do.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and a large winning opening remains. A process (step A13) during the opening of the big winning opening for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A8, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. Large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing
I do.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A16) during a small hit fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A8, if the special game processing number is "8", the small hit medium processing (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A
20), a symbol variation control process (step A21) relating to the control of variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display device 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning to the first starting port (step A103
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first starting port (step A
103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A1
09), a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second start opening (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second starting port (step A111
At ;N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the second starting port (step A
111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y). , the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
At 112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, when it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special Performing the figure start port switch common processing (step A115),
Terminate the start switch monitoring process. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, starting opening 1 switch 36
a and starter 2 switch 37a, load the starter signal output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starter switch to be monitored is output to the management device outside the game machine 10 (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6), save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139).

Next, extract the jackpot pattern random number of the starter switch to be monitored and prepare it (step A
140), and save in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).
Next, a small winning design random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A144).

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, to prepare a decorative special figure pending number command corresponding to the starting opening switch and special figure pending number to be monitored (step A147), perform the production command setting process (step A148),
End the special figure starting mouth switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. It constitutes a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random values stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37),
A predetermined number is stored as the second start memory up to the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14
6) will be described in detail. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 13, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information of losing is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and a small hit design prepared in step A143 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1
62), the process proceeds to step A164.
Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A167).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A169), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (
For example, it determines whether or not there will be a special result). The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). And the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A3
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A309; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316
), to end the special figure normal processing. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting condition is not satisfied, the production control device 300 outputs the customer waiting demonstration command forming the waiting information.
It will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) skips steps A310 to A312 and proceeds to step A313.

Also, in step A301, if the number of special figures 2 pending is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (
Step A304) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 pending number is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (
Step A308) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 15(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A321),
Loss information and big win information are set in a big win flag 1 for discriminating whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big win, and it is discriminated whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small win. Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag for doing is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 is set (step A33
3). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the object.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second
To determine whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big win flag 2 for deciding whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. Big hit flag 2 setting process (
Step A342) is performed.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A
343) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 5
2 flashing period timer) is set to an initial value (here, 100 ms) (step A35
3). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 16 and timer interrupt processing (not shown). In the description of the flow chart regarding effect control, the step number is "Step C
” will be used to explain.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
Effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from the rising edge) is performed. Inputs from the production button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this production button input processing, when there is an input from the production button 25 or the cross key 29, processing for changing the contents of production is performed. .
Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and a board effect setting process for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. (Step C20
) and returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 17 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.
Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 18 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.
If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot command such as a pending number command or an error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, pending number commands, pattern stop commands, probability information commands, error/illegal commands, and model designation commands. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

<Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game>
A special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28 .
For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided.
In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 . , then stop and display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
Decoration special figure fluctuation display game in which the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) , the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. in this case,
The decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first start memory one-on-one, and the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display corresponds to the first start memory stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of storage so that it becomes a decorative special figure start memory display, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. game), the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds one-to-one with the second start memory, and the second start in which the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display is stored first It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prediction such as the variation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display section 84. Is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display portion 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided.

19 and 20 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 19 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 20 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 19(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
display mode is "miss" result mode (LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A
1 to A7 are turned off). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 19 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also the result mode of "missing" (LED lamp B0 is lit and L
ED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off.

Also, here, since it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so in the display device 41, the first The numerical value of the starting memory number display section 85a is "1" and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". 0 decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure reservation" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (
See FIG. 4 (d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 is "no special figure reservation"
(a mode in which the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (see FIG. 4(d))).

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, The numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) see)
).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large pattern) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display section 81, and the left area of the second decoration game display section 82, The variable display of the identification information (small pattern) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. In addition, a variable display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, a mode corresponding to "varying" (the state where the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and the state where the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit alternately switching mode)
(see FIG. 4(b)) is started. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game start, but the variation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the variation time When the time elapses, the variable display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the number of decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 53 The display mode of changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
1) As shown in FIGS. 19(d) and 20, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 81 are hidden at the same time as the variable time is started. The 2 decoration game display section 82 reappears. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, because the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (Fig. 19 (
d)), as shown in FIGS. 19(e) and 20, "333" at the start of the variable time
The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t13 to t14). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 19 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t14 to t15), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 19(f) is performed ( t15~
t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 19(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
16) During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 19G, the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. , the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 19(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 20 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 20, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts slow fluctuation, and the identification information (right pattern) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display The timing at which the identification information (medium pattern) displayed in the area starts to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15". Also, "t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation) is "t16
” and “t17”. Further, "t17" is the timing at which the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, "t18" is the timing at which the right symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18" and "t19" are the timings at which the middle symbol starts to temporarily stop. is between

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14-t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t1
4 to t19), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
9) As shown in FIGS. 19(i) and 20, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 19(i) is different among FIGS. 19(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
19(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is the result mode of the "jackpot".
Therefore, in this case, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82
The stop pattern (jackpot pattern) and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display in the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, in the case of executing the variable display game, in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the next Special figure 1 to be executed
The variation display of the variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51
In a state consistent with the stop pattern of, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next,
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is started.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device 52
In a state consistent with the stop pattern of, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next,
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next will be started.

21 and 22 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "big hit". FIG. 21 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 22 is an example of a timing chart. FIGS. 21(a) and (b) are
19(a) and 19(b), the description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
1) As shown in FIGS. 21(d) and 22, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of the "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t23). When the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, from the start of the variable time to the transition effect (effect to display to move the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) to the start The time is when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (
19 (a), (b), 19 (e), (f), 21 (a), (b)) and special figure 2
When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 21(e) and (f)) , It is the same as when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in this embodiment, by differentiating the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory, the decoration special figure being displayed It notifies which of the first starting memory and the second starting memory the graphic starting memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 21(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t23 to t24). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 21(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24 to t25), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 21(f) is performed ( t25~
t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 21(g), the high speed fluctuation ends and the low speed fluctuation starts (t
26), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t26 to t27), and eventually comes to a temporary stop state (t27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 21(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 22 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t2
4 to t29), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
9) As shown in FIGS. 21(i) and 22, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 21(i) is different among FIGS. 21(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
21(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of the "win", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 52, the previous special figure 2
When the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is followed by the special figure Similarly, when the 2-variation display game is executed, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small hit pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next, and the next to be executed special figure 2
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation display is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result mode of "losing" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 23 and 24 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "big win". FIG. 23 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 24 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 23(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 23(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "missing".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
1) As shown in FIGS. 23(d) and 24, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is played. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t33). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 23(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t33 to t34). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 23(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t31 to t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34 to t35), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 23(f) is performed ( t35~
t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 23(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
36), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t36 to t37), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 23(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t38).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 24 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t3
4 to t39), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
9) As shown in FIGS. 23(i) and 24, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game results are displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 23(i) is different among FIGS. 23(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
23(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 51, the previous special figure 1
When the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "jackpot". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) on the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, when executing the 1-variation display game, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small winning pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next special figure 1
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation display is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot". FIG. 25 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 26 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 25(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 25(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
During the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 25 (c) In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
1) As shown in FIGS. 25(d) and 26, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is played. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 25(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 25(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t44 to t45), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 25(f) is performed ( t45~
t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 25(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
46), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 25(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 26 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44-t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t4
4 to t49), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
9) As shown in FIGS. 25(i) and 26, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 25(i) is different among FIGS. 25(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
25(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal jackpot". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", Figure 25 and As shown in FIG. 26, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 2 variation display game is executed, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "probability variable big hit" Figure 2
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 2 display 52 are displayed. In a state inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of 2 is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot" is set as "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the "R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is the "first jackpot" and the other one is the "second jackpot".
Similarly, in the case of "big win", the variable display of the next game is started in a state in which the stop symbols do not match.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the variation display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (the result of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result of the "variable jackpot"), or the result of the "variable jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal jackpot, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state is reached.

27 and 28 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "normal big hit". FIG. 27 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 28 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 27(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 27(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the part 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
1) As shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 28, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 27(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t53 to t54) , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 27(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t51 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 27(f) is performed ( t55~
t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 27(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
56), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 27(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 28 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t5
4 to t59), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
9) As shown in FIGS. 27(i) and 28, the display device 41 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 27(i) is different among FIGS. 27(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
27(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probable variation big hit", FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (variable jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 ), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Figure 1
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 1 display 51 are displayed. is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In a state where the 1 stop pattern (first jackpot pattern) does not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "probable variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the "R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is the "first jackpot" and the other one is the "second jackpot".
Similarly, in the case of "big win", the variable display of the next game is started in a state where the stop symbols do not match.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, the variable display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of "probability variation jackpot"), or the result of "probability variation jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first The stop symbols of the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82, and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
When the stop pattern of the display device 51 is consistent, the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game remain in the matching state. Start the display, and if it is not consistent, start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game in the inconsistent state Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second display device 41 2
When the stop pattern of the decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 are consistent, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the Start the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure remain in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the 2 variable display game is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching If there is
Also, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are not consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2
The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply referred to as "not matching. case”.

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case where the display game is executed has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "big hit", the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "big hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing a variable display game, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display where the result is "missing" Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to the game, it is "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "not matching", the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "hit "When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 21 and 22), and the result mode of "missing" on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped and the result is "hit" Special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 24), and collective display device 50 Special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 52 and the result is "second big hit" (see FIGS. 25 and 26), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "second big hit "When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 27 and 28), but "if not consistent" is limited to these cases. not. For example, the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the display device 52 and the result is "loss", or when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, or collective display Special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50 when the result mode of "either one of the big hit or the small hit" is stopped and the result is "either the other of the big hit or the small hit" Figure 1
Even when executing the special figure 2 variable display game next to the variable display game, "if not consistent"
becomes.

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then the left fluctuation display area. The high-speed fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area start high-speed fluctuation (the low-speed fluctuation ends) at the same time. End (start slow variation).
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26 and 28, the effect control device 300 has a first
In order to stop display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 81,
The identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 is set at the start of the high speed fluctuation (t15, t25).
, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46,
t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20, 22, and 24, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "
333”, the variable display starting from “333” starts (t14, t24, t3
4). Then, the effect control device 300, at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t
35), a variable display starting with "333" is displayed in a predetermined fixed result mode (e.g. "
123”) is executed to replace with variable display. Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbols (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode,
Second replacement to replace with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result, the remaining variable time (t16 to t19, t26 to t29, t36 to t39), and the variable pattern (whether or not a reach state occurs, etc.) Execute the process.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 changes the variable display starting from "222" to the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t45, t55). A first replacement process is performed to replace the . Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t46, t
56), the game result and the remaining variable time (t46
~ t49, t56 ~ t59) and fluctuation patterns (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.) and the like, and a second replacement process is executed to replace with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward.
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 18).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times that the large pattern is replaced may be one.
It is better to execute only replacement processing. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (or after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the large pattern ), the variable display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure variable display game is replaced with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement It is better to process. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decorative game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. If the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, when the high-speed variation of the large symbols ends, the large symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 are displayed in a desired reach mode (desired You may perform a replacement process to replace with a reach pattern).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbols) of the second decorative game display section 82 starts to fluctuate at high speed (starts fluctuating display) at the same time in the left area, right area, and middle area. At the same time as the region, the high-speed fluctuation ends (finishes the fluctuation display).
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26 and 28, the effect control device 300 is the second
In order to stop display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 82,
The identification information (small symbols) of the second decorative game display section 82 is displayed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29).
, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of small symbols,
It is configured to perform a third replacement process of replacing the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 18).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. When the small symbols are replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols, a first replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode. A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement processing for replacing the small symbols, the second replacement processing for replacing the small symbols is performed after the first replacement processing, or alternatively, the small symbols are replaced at high speed. It is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time or a plurality of times. When the number of times of replacing the small symbols is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Further, when the number of times of replacing the small symbols is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (eg, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (eg, t23 to t
24, t33-t34, t43-t44, t53-t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (eg, t24 to t25,
t34-t35, t44-t45, t54-t55) are the same.
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t15 to t16) and "not matched" (eg, t25 to t16).
t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched" (for example, t26 to
t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t17 to t18) and "not matched" (eg, t2
7 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the fluctuation time is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t28 to t29
, t38-t39, t48-t49, t58-t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation, and the time from the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation, the time from the start of the large pattern temporary stop display to the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation, and the large pattern reach By making the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "if it is consistent" and "if it is not consistent", start the fluctuation display in an inconsistent state It is possible to set the variation time for the case of the display to be the same as the variation time for the case where the variation display is started in the matching state. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special game state when the mode is set, and is a first variable display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition (a prize in a start winning port 36) among the start conditions as a variable display game. First variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variation display game), and establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions as a variation display game (to normal variation winning device 37 Control the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means and the second variable display means Corresponding to the game control means (game control device 100) and the variable display game, the identification pattern (
Effect display means capable of displaying a first decoration game for variably displaying a large pattern) and a second decoration game for variably displaying an identification pattern (small pattern) corresponding to the variable display game and smaller than the first decoration game. (Display device 41) and production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production display means
and, when executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game, the second variable display game
At the start of the variable display game, the result mode statically displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) statically displayed on the effect display means are different. There are cases where they do not match, and in that case, the game control means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game without performing processing to make these result modes match. The effect control means is configured to start variable display of identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 21 and 25). reference).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41),
When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) does not match, it corresponds to the second variable display game and the second variable display game in the state of not matching. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are performed in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the match is not made, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the special game state that occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode ("lost" result mode) And, the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is 0, and the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) The number of starting memory (second starting memory) to be the execution right is one or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100), after the end of the special game state, the second From a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300)
After the end of the special game state, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. (See FIGS. 21 and 25).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41)
is a winning pattern, and the stopped pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. .

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. pattern, and when the stop pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is changed to the special result mode is not limited to the "winning" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of the "big win" among the result modes of the "hit", or only the result mode of the "minor win" among the result modes of the "hit". It may be only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, it may be only the result mode of "10R jackpot" among the result modes of "hit", or the result mode of "hit" may be "
It may be only the result mode of "7R hit", or "2R hit" among the result modes of "hit".
It may be only the result mode of.

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 100), in a state in which the starting memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stored, It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the second starting memory number is 1 or greater, the first starting memory number is 0.
It does not have to be 1 (that is, the number of first starting memories may be 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of the second starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the first starting memory number must be greater than or equal to one and the second starting memory number must be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the second starting memory number should be greater than or equal to one and the first starting memory number should be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) has changed to the special result mode, the "start memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
The number of first starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is 1 or more It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the number of first starting memories is one or more, the number of second starting memories does not have to be zero (that is, the number of second starting memories may be one or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
The number of the first starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display (the other of the games) may be executed in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is possible to configure so that the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed in the order in which it is stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more. and the case where the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game, and in these cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means changes the display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode. and start
After the end of the special game state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to initiate a floating display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. If the stopped symbol on the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the game can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the A low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are identifiable and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify are convertible, and the variation display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game is possible. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means at the start of the second variation display game and the effect display. If the result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16), and if not consistent (t24 to t26, t3
4 to t36, t44 to t46, and t54 to 56).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large pattern) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "when matching" and "when not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the The identification pattern can be converted into a high-speed variation display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the start of the variation display of the identification symbol in the second decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display is performed through the high-speed variation display mode. Time until completion (t14-t19, t24-t29, t
34 to t39, t44 to t49, and t54 to 59), at the start of the second variable display game, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means, and the second variable display means stopped and displayed on the effect display means. The result mode of the decoration game is configured to be the same between when (t14 to t19) and when not matching (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59). be able to.
By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be set to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "matching" and "not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed are displayed. There may be a mode in which decoration games are not displayed.

Here, the effect control device 300 displays the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode, so that the decoration special figure start memory display It is possible to perform a pending change effect that suggests the result of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game and the result of the prediction such as the fluctuation pattern.
In the present embodiment, as the specific display mode of the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display, at least, the first specific display mode and the second specific display mode with a higher degree of expectation (expected value) than the first specific display mode
A specific display mode is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the normal display mode is set to white reservation (white decoration special figure starting memory display), but the normal display mode is not limited to white and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the first specific display mode is set to blue reservation (blue decoration special figure starting memory display), but the first specific display mode is not limited to blue and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the second specific display mode is set to red reservation (red decoration special figure starting memory display),
The second specific display mode is not limited to red and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the specific display mode (first specific display mode, second specific display mode) is not limited to those different in color from the normal display mode, and may be different from the normal display mode in other than color (for example, shape and size). can be

Next, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs an effect to variably display the identification information on the display device 41. At this time, at the start of variation of the identification information (first timing)
A first period in which the character part (first component) is hidden during the first period (a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information when the identification information starts to change) A specific effect will be described since the effect is performed as if there is a .
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the following effects of the special figure variation display game are performed for the special figure variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished). .
The special figure variation display game here refers to a variation display game on the display device 41, that is, a decorative special figure variation display game.

(A) Effect at Start of Variation FIGS. 29 and 30 are diagrams showing how the effect changes from the start of variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. 29(a) to (d) and FIGS. 30(e) to (h)
) indicates an effect displayed on the screen of the display device 41 .
Here, on the screen of FIG. 29(a), the display device 41, the first decoration game display section 81, the first starting memory number display section 85a, the second starting memory number display section 85b, the second A decorative game display portion 82, a standby memory display portion 83, and an active memory display portion 84 are shown. These functions are as described in the configuration of the game machine 10. FIG. In addition, since it becomes complicated, FIG. 29 to FIG.
1 omits matching.
In FIG. 29, FIG. 29(a) shows when the variation of the identification information stops in the special figure variation display game (
1st timing), which indicates the identification information at that time. In this case, the screen of the display device 41 displays a character portion (first component) and a number portion (second component).
is displayed in combination with each character part.
Specifically, the characters are displayed in a row on the screen in the order of "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro" from the left side, and "3" is displayed as the number part (second component). "4",
"5" is displayed in combination with these "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro".
Therefore, they are combined in the form of "Torasuke"+"3", "Tiger Rock"+"4", and "Tiger Taro"+"5", and are displayed as static patterns.

Here, in the screen of FIG. 29(a), a character portion (first component) and a number portion (second component) are displayed in the first decoration game display portion 81. As shown in FIG. Then, the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) = 1 is displayed in the first starting memory number display part 85a, and the second starting memory number (special figure 1 number) is displayed in the second starting memory number display part 85b 2 pending number), "0" is displayed.
The second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (second component), and here the number "345" is displayed. Furthermore, the standby storage display section 83 displays the current standby storage.
, only one image of a small round ball is illuminated. The memory-in-execution display section 84 shows how the variable start game is to be executed. In this scene, the memory-in-standby=1, so that the identification information starts to change in accordance with the situation. It is illuminated to indicate
After that, similarly, after the identification information starts to change, the display effects including numerical representation, lighting, etc. of each of the above-described display units are performed according to the game state at that time.

Next, the process shifts to FIG. 29(b), where an effect at the time when identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing) is performed. At the start of the variation of the identification information in FIG. 29(b), only the character parts "Torasuke", "Tora lock", and "Torataro" are action (for example, the character part is the axis (the so-called vertical character part) Each axis rotates individually around the center), and the effect is to hide the character part. In addition, in order to show how the variable start game will be executed from now on, the running memory display section 84 moves the image of the small round ball that existed in the running memory display section 83 to the running memory display section 84 and identifies it. The information change start action is notified (same below).
It should be noted that the point in time when the effect shown in FIG. 29(b) is shifted corresponds to the first timing at which the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is started.
On the other hand, "3", "4", and "5" as numeral portions (second components) do not rotate and remain stationary. In addition, the character portion starts to rotate, and after that, as shown in FIG.
), but in the scene of FIG. 29(b), only the character portion rotates, showing an effect in the middle of hiding.
It should be noted that, for example, the entire pattern including the number portion (the entirety of the character portion and the number portion of the identification information) may be rotated.

29(c), the characters "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro" disappear from the screen and are completely hidden. At this time, "3", "4", and "5" as the number portions (second constituent elements) are enlarged and displayed within the screen.
In this way, when the characters "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro" disappear and are completely hidden, the number portion (second component) "3 , 4
, "5" is enlarged and displayed at this point (that is, the number "3"
The point at which "4" and "5" are enlarged and displayed within the screen) is the point at which the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is completed.
In the above effect, the number part (second component) is enlarged and displayed in the screen, but this is not a limitation, and for example, the number part (second component) is not enlarged and remains the original size. You may let
From the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 29(b),
The time until the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 29(c) is completed is 1.
about seconds. However, it is not limited to one second, and may be changed depending on the contents of the game.
29(d).
The patterns of 3, 4, and 5 start to fluctuate at high speed, and the figures of 3, 4, and 5 fluctuate at such high speed that the numbers cannot be discerned. The high-speed fluctuations are shown in three rows of arrow patterns. The second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (the second component). There is an effect to display that the number part is changing at high speed.

Next, as described above, after the patterns of "3", "4", and "5" as the number portions (second components) fluctuate at high speed, the identification information is sequentially stopped, and the screen of FIG. transition to
Moving to the screen of FIG. 30, first, as shown in FIG. 30(e), the left pattern "3" as a number portion (second component) descends from the top of the screen facing forward and stops at a temporary stop position. A performance is held.
Next, in FIG. 30(f), an effect is performed in which the pattern of "Torasuke", which is the character part, moves into the screen from the left side of the screen, and the pattern of the number part, "3", is temporarily displayed. In the process of stopping, an effect of rotating the axis is performed. In this way, in the process of temporarily stopping the left symbol, an effect is performed in which the number "3" rotates on its axis and the character portion (first component) appears. At this time, the middle and right symbols are in high speed fluctuation.
Next, the process shifts to FIG. 30(g), the left symbol completes the temporary stop, and the character part (first component) and the numeral part "3" are displayed as the left symbol. At this time, the left symbol during the temporary stop is shaking and fluctuating, and this state is shown in FIG. 30(g). At this time, middle symbols and right symbols continue to be in high speed fluctuation. In the second decoration game display section 82, an arrow is displayed indicating that the number part is in high speed fluctuation (because the left symbol is in a temporary stop state and is not completely stopped).
. Even if the character portion (first component) temporarily stops, the second decorative game display section 82 continues to fluctuate at a constant speed, and the character portion (first component) stops completely after the fluctuation is completed. At this time, the display of the second decoration game display section 82 stops all at once.
After that, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is either off or it develops to reach production.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game develops to the ready-to-win production, the production before developing to the ready-to-win production shifts to FIG. 30(i) as an effect before being out.
The production before developing to the ready-to-win production is shown in FIG. 30(h), and in FIG. element) enters the screen from the right side of the screen. At this time, the middle pattern is in high speed fluctuation. After that, the process shifts to FIG. 31(l).
On the other hand, the effect before the failure is shown in FIG. 30(i). rock"
A design is performed that moves into the screen from the right side of the screen. At this time, the middle pattern is in high speed fluctuation.
Next, the process shifts to FIG. 30(j), the right symbol completes the temporary stop, and the character part (first component) and the numeral part "4" are displayed as the right symbol. At this time, the right symbol during the temporary stop is shaking and fluctuating, and this state is shown in FIG. 30(j). Therefore, the patterns corresponding to the left and right character portions (first constituent elements) are both shaken and fluctuated. Since the number portion of the second decoration game display portion 82 is fluctuating, an effect is performed to indicate that the number portion is fluctuating at high speed with an arrow.
At this time, in the middle design, the number part "5" rotates on the axis, and the character part "
Torataro" pattern will appear on the screen from the top of the screen. After that, the medium symbols also complete the temporary stop. Since the symbols on the left and right sides are "3" and "4", no matter what kind of number part is stopped in the middle symbol, the game result is not a reach, but a loss. Here, the number part "5" will stop in the middle pattern, and the effect is shown in FIG. 30(k).
, all symbols stop at "3", "5", and "4", and the game result is lost. and,
Since the second decorative game display section 82 displays the current state of the number part (second component), "
3", "5", and "4" are displayed to indicate that it is a losing game. In addition, the image of the small round ball that existed in the memory-in-execution display section 84 also disappears, and the memory-in-execution (so-called suspension during change) is displayed.
will also be deleted.

As described above, at the start of variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game (first timing)
, the characters "Torasuke", "Tora Lock", and "Torataro" disappear from the screen and are completely hidden. , 4
, and 5 are displayed in an enlarged size on the screen, the player sees the state in which the character portion is completely hidden, thereby emphasizing the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate. become,
It is easy to understand, and you will feel that the progress of the game is smooth.
That is, since the player recognizes the display (effect) in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information starts to change, it is possible to make the identification information change start effective from this point of view as well. can.
Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the start time of variation of the identification information is emphasized, so that the progress of the game can be made clear and smooth, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
By the way, in the past, although the character design was sometimes hidden during the progress of the game,
In many cases, it is simply hidden and has no relation to the progress of the game before or after the display, and there is no intention to emphasize anything in terms of the relation with the game before the display is hidden or the game after the display is completed. It was difficult for the player to understand how the game progressed, and it could not be said that the progress of the game was smooth.
Further, conventionally, it was not possible to say that the effect of hiding the character pattern was effective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by producing a state in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information starts to change, the time when the identification information starts to change is emphasized and the player can understand. It is possible to make the user feel that the progress of the game is smooth.
Also, since the character part will be completely hidden when the identification information starts to change,
For example, the game before hiding is before the identification information starts to change, and the time when the hiding is completed is the start of high-speed change of the identification information. can be firmly recognized by the player, the player can easily understand that the intention is to emphasize the start time of the fluctuation of the identification information, and the player can also recognize that the game progresses smoothly, It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Here, the inventive concept of effect control at the time when identification information starts to fluctuate as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, at a first timing of the game, a first effect is performed to hide the first component on display means.
The first effect corresponds to the effect from the start of the effect for shifting from the state in which the first component of the identification information is displayed on the display means to the non-display state to the state in which the non-display is completed. ing.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a slightly more limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
A gaming machine, wherein the variable display game is controlled so that there is a first period during which the first component is hidden on display means at a first timing of the variable display game.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.
Next, the inventive concept of production control with a further limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, an effect is started for the first component to shift from the state displayed on the display means to the non-display, and the effect is performed until the non-display is completed. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that there is a first period in which the game is displayed.

Here, when the identification information starts to change in the special figure change display game, the character part (the first
This corresponds to the first timing at which the non-display effect of the component) is started.
The first period is a concept of a period from a state in which the character portion (first component) of the identification information is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed when the identification information starts to fluctuate.
During the period, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, the character part (first component) of the identification information is displayed to change to non-display, and until the non-display is completed. From the viewpoint of rendering, the first period can be said to be a non-display transition rendering period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information when the identification information starts to fluctuate. In the first period, the timing when the identification information starts to change (first timing) is the start timing of the first period, and the timing when the character portion (first component) disappears and non-display is completed. This is the end timing of the first period.

Next, the inventive concept that limits the first timing is expressed as follows.
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display game is controlled such that the first timing of the variable display game is the start of variation of the identification information.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 29(b),
The inventive concept of effect control until completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 29(c) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing when the identification information starts to fluctuate, an effect is started to shift the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a state in which it is not displayed,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, only the character portion is rotated and becomes a non-display state, and the number portion (second component) is controlled to be enlarged and displayed, and the non-display of the character portion is controlled. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display game is controlled so that there is a first period during which an effect is performed until a state of completion is reached.

(B) Effect at the Time of Reach Next, a specific example of the effect at the time of reach of identification information will be described.
Here, as other game effects, a second period (identification information At the start of ready-to-win, an effect is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information.
FIGS. 31(l) to 31(p) are diagrams showing how the effects change from when the identification information is reached in the special figure variation display game. 31(l) to (p) show effects displayed on the screen of the display device 41. FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 31(l) shows the state at the time of reach of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. The reach time here includes both when the identification information develops into a reach performance and when it becomes a super reach in the special figure fluctuation display game, and this timing corresponds to the second timing.

As described above, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game develops into the ready-to-win production, after going through the production of FIG. move.
In FIG. 31(l), while the left pattern is temporarily stopped and fluctuating, the right pattern is also temporarily stopped, and the character part (first component) and the number "3" are displayed as the right pattern. FIG. 31(l) shows a state in which the right symbol during the temporary stop sways and fluctuates. At this time, the middle pattern continues to be changed. Therefore, it becomes a ready-to-win state with the symbols "3", "3". In addition, as for the fluctuation of the above middle pattern, the medium pattern fluctuates relatively slowly (because it is normal reach), and it is clearly visible that the middle pattern is also fluctuating, so it is displayed with a dark black arrow. there is
In this way, as shown in FIG. 31(l), when the identification information reaches the screen of the display device 41, both of the left and right identification information are character parts (first component), and the pattern of "Torasuke" is displayed on the screen. , a combination of "3" as the number part (second component) is displayed, and the effect is that reach has occurred.
Since reach has occurred, the player will watch the progress of the game with a sense of anticipation for the big win.

Next, the process shifts to the production of FIG. 31(m), and the pattern of "Torasuke", which is the character part (first component) as part of the left and right identification information, explodes, and the number part (second component) ) is enlarged in the screen. At this time, the middle pattern continues to change, and as for the state of the middle pattern, the medium pattern is translucent and fluctuates at high speed, so it is not very clear that the middle pattern is in the process of changing. Therefore, it is displayed with a thin arrow (this is because it is sufficient to suggest that the middle pattern is changing).
Next, the screen shifts to that shown in FIG. 31(n), and an effect is performed in which the wreckage of the "Torasuke" pattern, which is the character portion (first component) as part of the identification information of the left and right of the explosion, is deleted from the screen. will be For example, a pattern of a broom appears on the screen, and an effect of sweeping the wreckage with the broom is performed, and the wreckage of the character portion (first component) is deleted from the screen.
On the other hand, for the number part (second component) "3", an effect is performed in which the enlarged number part "3" is reduced and moved to the corners of the screen (for example, both upper corners of the screen).
At this time, as a state of fluctuation of the middle pattern, since the middle pattern is translucent and fluctuates at high speed,
It's not very obvious that the medium symbols are moving, so they are indicated by thin arrows.

Next, the screen moves to FIG. 31(o), and an effect that develops into SP reach, that is, super reach is performed. It should be noted that when the Super Reach pattern appears (at the moment when the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 31(o)), the effect of sweeping with a broom ends.
In Super Reach, an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining whether or not it is a big hit is started. In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit is displayed using five star marks.
In the example of (o), 4 out of 5 stars are illuminated, and the player is notified that the expectation for the big win is the second highest.
At this point, hiding the character portion is completed. After that, the special figure variation display game is either a big hit or a loss.
From the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(m),
The time until the Super Reach pattern appears (that is, the character portion (
The time until completion of the non-display effect of the first component)) is about 2 seconds. However, it is not limited to 2 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.

In this way, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (second
At the timing), an effect is performed in which the character part (first component) performs some action (for example, explodes) and the number part (second component) expands within the screen. By exploding the character part (first component) and expanding the number part (second component), the super reach or the reach is emphasized.
In addition, although the number portion (second component) is enlarged in the above effect, the number portion (second component) may be reduced, for example.
Also, the wreckage of the exploded character portion (first component) is deleted from the screen, and the enlarged number portion is reduced (not limited to reduction, for example, the number portion may be enlarged). After moving to the corner, an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining whether or not the character is a big hit is started. The development of the identification information to the ready-to-win effect and the super-to-win effect are emphasized, and the player feels that the progress of the game is easy to understand and smooth.

That is, since the player is more aware of the display (effect) in which the character part is completely hidden when the identification information is in the ready-to-win state, the development of the ready-to-win effect of the identification information and the super It can be an effective production for becoming a reach.
Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, since the effect at the time of reach of the identification information is emphasized, the progress of the game can be made clear and smooth, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
By the way, in the past, although the character design was sometimes hidden during the progress of the game,
It is simply hidden, and there is often no relationship with the progress of the game before and after. It is difficult for the player to understand what is intended to be emphasized only by the display, and the progress of the game cannot be said to be smooth.
Further, conventionally, it was not possible to say that the effect of hiding the character pattern was effective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by producing a state in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information reaches, the time when the identification information reaches is emphasized. It is possible to make the user feel that the progress of the game is smooth.
In addition, since an effect is performed in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information is reached, it is possible to have a relationship with the progress of the game before and after. This is a normal game, and when the non-display is completed, the game result (big win or loss) after the reach appears, so the player should be firmly aware that the reach performance of the identification information is started. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the intention is to emphasize the reach start time of the identification information, and allows the player to recognize that the game progresses smoothly, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

29, a control for producing a state in which the character portion of the identification information is completely hidden when the identification information starts to fluctuate, and a state in which the character portion of the identification information is completely hidden when the identification information is reached. The content of the control may be a combination of the control for producing
The inventive concept that combines both controls in this way is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At a first timing of the game, performing a first effect for hiding the first component on display means;
A gaming machine characterized in that, at a second timing of the game, a second effect is performed to hide the first component on display means.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a slightly more limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, there is a first period for not displaying the first component on the display means, and
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display game is controlled so that there is a second period during which the first component is hidden on the display means at the second timing of the variable display game.

Next, the inventive concept that limits the first timing and the second timing is expressed as follows.
The control means is
The first timing is when the identification information starts to fluctuate,
A game machine characterized by controlling a variable display game such that the second timing is the start of reach of identification information.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a further limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At a first timing, an effect is started for the first component element to shift from being displayed on the display means to non-display.
There is a period and
At the second timing, an effect for transitioning from a state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a non-display state is started, and a second effect is performed until the non-display state is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that a period exists.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(m),
The inventive concept of effect control from FIG. 31(n) to completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(o) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing, an effect is started for the first component to shift from being displayed on the display means to non-display, and a second effect is performed until the non-display is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that a period exists.

Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.
The start of reach of the identification information in the special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the second timing at which the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is started.
The second period is the concept of the period from the state in which the character portion (first component) of the identification information is displayed to the state in which it is not displayed at the start of reach of the identification information, in other words, In the second period, at the start of reach of the identification information, an effect is performed to transition from the state where the character part (first component) of the identification information is displayed to non-display, and the non-display is completed. It is also the production period until, in terms of production. The second period can also be said to be a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information at the start of reach of the identification information. In the second period, the start timing of the identification information reach (second timing) is the start timing of the second period, and the timing when the character part (first component) disappears and the non-display is completed is the second period. end timing.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(m),
The inventive concept of effect control from FIG. 31(n) to completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(o) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing, which is the start of reach of the identification information, an effect for transitioning from the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to the non-display is started,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, the character part (first component) explodes, and the number part (second component) expands in the screen, and the exploded character part (first component) is displayed. element) is deleted from the screen, the enlarged number part becomes smaller and moves to the corner of the screen, and the character part disappears. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game as follows.

Next, as another example of the production at the time of reach, the production (eye-catching production) of FIG. 31 (p)
It may pass through, so I will explain it.
Specifically, FIG. 31 (l) is the state of the reach of the identification information in the special figure fluctuation display game, and at the time of reach here, as described above, the identification information is in the reach production in the special figure fluctuation display game. It includes both when it develops and when it becomes super reach, and this timing corresponds to the second timing.
Then, instead of transitioning to FIG. 31(m) in this example, FIG. 31(l) to FIG. 31(p)
) to the production.
In other words, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (
At the second timing), when the combination of the character part (first component) "Torasuke" and the number part (second component) "3" is displayed and reach occurs, 31(l) transitions to FIG. 31(p), and as shown in FIG. is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 and instantly the character part (first component)
is hidden, while the pattern of "3" as the number portion (second component) is reduced and moved to the corners of the screen (for example, both upper corners of the screen).

Here, the eye-catching image is displayed on either the front side or the rear side of the display device 41. When displayed on the front side, the character portion (first component) and number portion of the identification information are displayed on the front side. Both (second components) are covered with an eye-catching image and become invisible to the player.
In the effect, the eye-catching image is displayed on the front side of the display device 41, so the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden.
Note that the rendering period of FIG. 31(p) is, for example, about 0.5 seconds.
Next, FIG. 31(p) shifts to FIG. 31(o), and an effect that develops into SP reach, that is, super reach is performed (the effect contents of FIG. 31(o) are as described above). It should be noted that when the Super Reach pattern appears (at the moment of transition to the screen of FIG. 31(p)), the effect of displaying the eye-catching as the predetermined image on the screen ends, and the non-display of the character portion is completed. become.

In this way, when the ready-to-win effect develops or becomes super-reach (second timing) at the start of non-display of the character portion (first component), the eye-catching is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as described above. The point at which the character portion (first component) disappears immediately after being displayed is the point at which the non-display of the character portion (first component) is completed.
This will emphasize the development of reach performance and the super reach.
Also, as shown in FIG. 31(p), at the start of non-display of the character portion (first component), the eye catcher is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as described above, and the character portion (
Since the first component) is hidden, the player can see the state in which the character part is completely hidden by the eye-catching display effect, and the development of the reach effect of the identification information. The fact that super reach is achieved is emphasized, and the player feels that the progress of the game is easy to understand and smooth.

That is, the player is more aware of the display (effect) in which the character portion is completely hidden by the eye-catching display effect when the identification information is in the ready-to-reach state.
From this point of view as well, it is possible to develop into a ready-to-reach effect of identification information and an effective effect to become a super reach.
Therefore, even with the eye-catching display effect shown in FIG. 31(p), the effect when the identification information reaches reach is emphasized in the variable display game, so that the progress of the game can be made clear and smooth. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, the time from the start of the eye-catching display effect shown in FIG. (That is, the time until the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is completed) is about 0.5 seconds.However, it is not limited to 0.5 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game. may

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(l),
The inventive concept of effect control from the effect shown in FIG. 31(p), which is an eye-catching display effect, to the completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 31(o) is as follows. is represented by
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing, which is the start of reach of the identification information, an effect for transitioning from the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to the non-display is started,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, an eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap the character portion (first component), and the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden, while the number is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that a portion (second component) becomes smaller and is displayed in a corner of the screen.

FIG. 32 shows an effect in which there is a first period in which the character part (first component) is hidden at the start of the variation of the identification information (first timing) in the special figure variation display game, and when the identification information reaches ( 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of an effect in which there is a second period during which the character portion (first component) is not displayed at the second timing). FIG.
Here, the first period and the second period are conceptions of a period from when the character portion (first component) of the identification information is displayed to when it is not displayed.
To put it a little easier to understand, the first period and the second period are effects for transitioning from a state in which the character portion (first component) of the identification information is displayed to non-display. It can be explained as a production period until it reaches a state of completion.
Based on this explanation, the first period and the second period can be said to be a non-display transition rendering period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information.
In the first period, the timing when the identification information starts to change (first timing) is the start timing of the first period, and the timing when the character portion (first component) disappears and is not displayed is the first period. It is time to finish.
In addition, the second period is the start timing of the second period when the identification information reaches (second timing), and the end of the second period is the timing when the character part (first component) disappears and is not displayed. It's time.

Fig. 32 (A) is the start of variation of identification information in the special figure variation display game (first timing)
, the first period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 32A, the character portion (first component) is displayed when the identification information starts to change (first timing), and the character portion (first component) is displayed when the identification information starts to change (first timing). 1 component) becomes non-display.
After the change start time (first timing) passes, the character portion (first component) rotates and gradually disappears, so the display of the character portion (first component) gradually fades in FIG. 32(A). Finally, the display is hidden. Here, the image of the character portion (the first component) fades and disappears in a substantially oblique straight line.
According to such an effect, the display of the character portion (first component) gradually fades after the identification information starts to change, so that the player can see the disappearance of the character portion (first component). It has the advantage of being easy to understand.
It should be noted that the image of the character portion (first component) is not rendered to disappear in an almost oblique straight line, but instead, as shown by (a1) in FIG. The effect may be such that the character portion (first component) disappears in an instant.
According to such an effect, the display of the character portion (the first component) suddenly disappears in an instant at the timing (a1) after the identification information starts to fluctuate, so that an impactful effect can be given to the player.

Next, FIG. 32(B) shows the character part (first component) at the start of reaching the identification information in the special figure fluctuation display game (second timing), until the character part (first component) is displayed to be hidden.
It is a timing chart explaining a period.
In addition, the reach of the identification information shown in FIG. 32(B) is particularly the first special reach (SP1)
The reach of the identification information shown in FIG. 32(C), which will be described later, is an example of the second special reach (SP2).
The first special reach (SP1) here is an example of a reach in which the effects progress in the order of (i), (m), (n), and (o) in FIG. 31, and the second special reach (SP2) is shown in FIG. (i)
, (p)
This is an example of a reach (especially a reach including an eye-catching effect) in which the effect progresses in the order of (o).
First, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in the first special reach (SP1), the character portion (first component) is displayed at the start of reach (second timing) of the identification information, and the start of reach Hour (second timing) is the start timing of the second period until the character portion (first component) is hidden.
When the reach start time (second timing) passes, the character part (first component) explodes, and the wreckage is swept away with a broom, and the character part (first component) gradually disappears from the screen. Since it disappears, FIG. 32(B) shows how the display of the character portion (first component) gradually fades and finally disappears.
In this case, the image of the character portion (first component) fades and disappears in a substantially oblique straight line.

According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
Since the display of gradually fades, there is an advantage that the player can easily see how the character portion (the first component) disappears.
It should be noted that the image of the character portion (first component) is not rendered to disappear in an almost oblique straight line, for example, as shown by (b1) in FIG. The effect may be such that the character portion (first component) disappears in an instant.
According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
disappears suddenly at the timing (b1) in an instant, so that it is possible to give the player an impactful presentation.

FIG. 32(C) shows the second special reach (SP2), at the start of the reach of the identification information in the special figure variation display game (second timing), the character part (first component) is hidden from display. It is a timing chart explaining the 2nd period to.
As shown in FIG. 32 (C), in the second special reach (SP2), the character portion (first component) is displayed at the start of reach (second timing) of the identification information, and at the start of reach ( The second timing) is the start timing of the second period until the character portion (first component) is hidden.
Regarding the second special reach (SP2), the character part (first component) "
A combination of the design of "Torasuke" and "3" as the number part (second component) is displayed,
31(l) to FIG. 31(p), and as shown in FIG. An eye catch as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to be superimposed, and the character part (first component) is instantly hidden, while "3" as a number part (second component) is displayed. An effect is performed in which the pattern becomes smaller and moves to the corners of the screen (for example, both upper corners of the screen).
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(C), the image of the character portion (first component) disappears almost instantaneously in an oblique straight line with a steeper slope than in the case shown in FIG. 32(B). Become.

According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
disappears almost instantaneously, the player sees the state in which the character portion is almost instantly hidden by the eye-catching display effect, thereby emphasizing the super reach.
In addition, instead of the effect that the image of the character part (first component) disappears almost instantly,
For example, as shown by (b2) in FIG. 32(C), at this timing (b2), an eye catch as a predetermined image is suddenly displayed so as to completely overlap the character portion (first component), and the character portion ( The effect may be such that the first component) disappears in an instant.
According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
suddenly changes to an eye-catching display at the timing (b2), and the character portion (the first component) disappears in an instant, so that a more impactful presentation can be given to the player.

Note that the non-display transition effect control described above may be implemented in the following manner.
The period from the start of the non-display effect of the character part (first component) at the start of the identification information change to the completion of the non-display effect, and the non-display of the character part (first component) at the start of the reach of the identification information The period from the start of the effect to the completion of the non-display effect may have the same length.
In this way, since both periods are the same, the non-display transition effect of the character portion (first component) to be executed can be easily made to have the same contents, and the character portion (first component) is hidden. There is an advantage that the contents of the presentation in the process of becoming the same are the same, and the player can easily recognize it. In addition, since both are the same period, there is an effect that the character portion (the first component) can be hidden at each timing of the presentation without any sense of discomfort.
Furthermore, in the above effect control, as described above, the first period and the second period may be the same, but the first period may generally be shorter than the second period. Moreover, the first period is not limited to this, and the first period may be longer than the second period. These should just set the content of production|presentation control appropriately according to the situation of a game.

Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described.
<Modification 1>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a specific example of effect control in Modification 1, and particularly shows a specific example at the time of reach of identification information in a special figure variation display game.
Even in this example, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (
second timing), the character part (first component) is hidden during the second period (
At the start of ready-to-reach of identification information, an effect is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information.
FIGS. 33A to 33F are diagrams showing how the effects change from when the identification information is reached in the special figure variation display game. 31(a) to (f) show effects displayed on the screen of the display device 41. FIG.
Here, on the screen of FIG. 33(a), the display device 41, the first decoration game display section 81, the first starting memory number display section 85a, the second starting memory number display section 85b, the second A decorative game display portion 82, a standby memory display portion 83, and an active memory display portion 84 are shown. These functions are as described in the configuration of the gaming machine 10. FIG. In addition, since it becomes complicated, reference numerals are omitted from FIG. 33 to each screen of FIGS. 34 and 35 described later.

In FIG. 33(a), while the left pattern is temporarily stopped, the right pattern is also temporarily stopped, and the right pattern is a character 601 imitating a robot corresponding to the character portion (first component).
and the number "3" are displayed. Since the following figures are complicated, the characters that imitate robots are omitted.
Each pattern of the character portion (first component) is not shaken and fluctuated when the temporary stop is completed.
At this time, the middle pattern continues to be changed. Therefore, it becomes a ready-to-win state with the symbols "3", "3".
In this way, as shown in FIG. 33(a), when the identification information reaches the screen of the display device 41, a character 601 imitating a robot, both of which are character parts (first component), is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as the left and right identification information. A combination of a symbol and "3" as a number part (second component) is displayed to create a reach effect. Since reach has occurred, the player will watch the progress of the game with a sense of anticipation for the big win.

Next, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 33(b), and the medium symbols that have been fluctuating at the start of the reach start to rotate after the start of the reach. Here, the number part (second component) of the medium design starts rotating, and in this modification, "2" starts rotating as the number part (second component) of the medium design.
Next, the process shifts to the production of FIG. 33(c), and the left and right patterns of a character 601 imitating a robot, which is the character part (first component), and the number part (second component) of the middle pattern during rotation are "2" as a predetermined image is displayed on the display device 4 so as to overlap all of them.
An effect is performed in which the pattern of "2" as the character part (first component) and the number part (second component) is instantly hidden after being displayed on the screen of No. 1.
As eye catch 1 as a predetermined image, an image of a rocket flying in a large star is displayed here.

Here, the image of the eye catch 1 is displayed on either the front side or the rear side of the display device 41. When it is displayed on the front side, the character portion (first component) and the number of the identification information are displayed. Both parts (second components) are covered with the eye catch 1 image and are invisible to the player.
In the production described above, since the image of the eye catch 1 is displayed on the front side of the display device 41,
The character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) are instantly hidden.
Note that the rendering period of FIG. 33(c) is, for example, about 0.5 seconds.
Next, the screen shifts to that shown in FIG. 33(d), where the character portion (first component) as the middle pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, and the left and right patterns of "3" as the number portion (second component). is reduced and moved to each upper corner of the screen. Therefore, in this scene, the ready-to-win pattern is only the number "3".

Next, the screen shown in FIG. 33(e) is displayed, and "3" is set as the number part (second component) of the character part (first component), which is the middle pattern of the character imitating the robot and the reduced left and right pattern. On the other hand, an eye catcher 2 as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to overlap all of them, and instantly a pattern of "3" as a character part (first component) and a number part (second component) is displayed. A non-display effect is performed.
As an eye catcher 2 as a predetermined image, an image is displayed in which all the robot-like characters used as the character portion (first component) are gathering on the screen (so-called all-member gathering). As a result, the player can feel the impact by watching the performance in which all the characters imitating the robot gather, and heighten the expectation for the big win.

Next, the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 33(f), and an effect that develops into SP reach, that is, super reach is performed. It should be noted that when the Super Reach pattern appears (at the moment when the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 33(f)), the effect of displaying the eye catch 2 as the predetermined image on the screen ends.
In Super Reach, an effect (battle effect) for determining whether or not it is a big hit is started. At this time, a character imitating a robot (here, a robot character corresponding to "3") appears on the screen, and "3" is also displayed as a number portion (second constituent element), and "3" leads to a big hit. A production that creates a sense of anticipation will be performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit is represented by five star marks, and in the example of FIG. is the second highest.
At this point, hiding the character portion is completed. After that, the special figure variation display game is either a big hit or a loss.
It should be noted that the time from the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) with the appearance of the eye catch 1 shown in FIG. The time to complete the non-display effect of the part (first component) is about 2 seconds. However, it is not limited to 2 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.

In this way, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (second
Timing), while the pattern of the character modeled after the robot, which is the character part (first component), is displayed on the screen, the pattern of "3" is also displayed as the number part (second component). , suddenly an eye-catching 1 as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen, and instantly the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) are hidden. In addition, after that, after displaying that the reach of "3" is displayed once, another image of eye catch 2 is displayed on the screen again, and instantly the character part (first component) and the number part An effect is performed in which the (second component) is hidden.
Therefore, since the effect of displaying the eye-catching as the predetermined image on the screen is performed twice, the effect of hiding the character part (first component) and the number part (second component) is emphasized. A greater impact can be given to the player. Also, 2
Since the eye-catching effect is performed for each time, the super reach or the reach is further emphasized.
In particular, from the player's point of view, by seeing the state in which the character part is completely hidden by the two eye-catching display effects, the development of the reach effect of the identification information and the super reach are emphasized. As a result, it is easy to understand and the player feels that the progress of the game is smooth.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 33(c),
The inventive concept of the effect control from the effect shown in FIG. 33(e), which is the second eye-catching display effect, to the completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 33(f) is as follows. It is represented as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing, which is the start of reach of the identification information, an effect for transitioning to non-display after the first component is displayed on the display means is started,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, an eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap the character portion (first component), and at least the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden, After that, once the ready-to-win pattern is displayed, the eye-catching as the second predetermined image is displayed again, and the variable display game is controlled so that at least the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden. A gaming machine characterized by:

Next, Modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described.
<Modification 2>
34 and 35 are diagrams showing a specific example of effect control in Modification 2, and particularly show a specific example at the start of variation of identification information in a special figure variation display game and at the time of reach.
In this example as well, the first period during which the character part (first component) is not displayed at the start of the variation of the identification information (the first timing) (the character part of the identification information (at the start of the variation of the identification information)
1st component)) to create a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display), and when it develops into a reach effect of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (
second timing), the character part (first component) is hidden during the second period (
At the start of ready-to-reach of identification information, an effect is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information.

(A) Effect at the Start of Variation FIGS. 34(a) to 34(f) are diagrams showing how the effect changes from the start of variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. 34(a) to (f) show effects displayed on the screen of the display device 41. FIG.
In FIG. 34, FIG. 34(a) shows when the identification information starts to change in the special figure change display game (
1st timing), which indicates the identification information at that time. In this case, on the screen of the display device 41, a character 611 imitating a robot (corresponding to the character part (first component)) is displayed, and "2", "3" and "4" are displayed in combination with each character portion, the character 611 imitating a robot on the left side and the symbol "2" as the number portion (second component) both start rotating. The state of the production performed is shown. It should be noted that since the following description will be complicated, the reference to characters that imitate robots will be omitted as appropriate.

Next, the process moves to FIG. 34(b), and an effect is performed in which a special character 621 is added to a character 611 imitating a robot, which is a rotating left pattern. Here, a character imitating a disk is added as a special character 621 . A special character 621 imitating a disk is a character 611 imitating a rotating robot (character part (first
An effect is performed in which the element )) disappears at the top of the screen.
FIG. 34(c) shows the special character 621 disappearing in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the character 611 imitating a rotating robot.
It shows how only "2", which is a component), is rotating.
Further, as shown in FIG. 34(c), a special character 621 is added to a character 611 imitating a rotating medium-sized robot.
Similarly, a disk-like character is added as a special character 621 . A special character 621 imitating a disk is a character 61 imitating a rotating robot, which is a medium pattern.
1 (character portion (first component)) is accompanied by an effect of disappearing to the top of the screen.
FIG. 34(d) shows a state in which the special character 621 disappears in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by a character 611 imitating a rotating robot, which is a middle pattern. It shows how only "3", which is the element), is rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(d), an effect is performed in which a special character 621 is added to a character 611 imitating a robot, which is a further rotating right pattern.
Similarly, a disk-like character is added as a special character 621 . A special character 621 imitating a disk is a character 61 imitating a rotating robot, which is the pattern on the right.
1 (character portion (first component)) is accompanied by an effect of disappearing to the top of the screen.
FIG. 34(e) shows the special character 621 disappearing to the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the character 611 imitating a rotating robot, which is the right pattern. It shows how only "4", which is the element), is rotating.
From the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(b),
The time until the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(e) is completed is 2
about seconds. However, it is not limited to 2 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.
Here, the period from the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(b) to the completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(e) corresponds to the first period. In the first period, the time when the identification information starts to change (first timing) is the start timing of the first period (time when the production starts in FIG. 34(b)), and the character portion (
The timing at which the first component) disappears and the non-display is completed (at the end of the rendering in FIG. 34(e)) is the end timing of the first period.
After passing through FIG. 34(e), it then shifts to FIG. 34(f). In FIG. 34(f), all three columns of character portions (first component elements) are hidden, and three columns of number portions (second component elements) are rapidly changing. Fast fluctuations are indicated by arrows.
After passing through FIG. 34(f), it proceeds to the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 35(a) (details will be described later)
.

As described above, at the start of variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game (first timing)
, a special character 621 is added to a character 611 imitating a robot, and an effect is performed in which the character 611 imitating a rotating robot disappears at the top of the screen, and so on. A special character 621 is also added to the character 611 of , and an effect is performed in which the character 611 imitating a rotating robot disappears to the top of the screen, and the characters 611 in three rows disappear from the screen. At this time, the number portions (second components) "2", "3", and "4" are continuously displayed on the screen. By seeing the state in which the part is completely hidden, the point at which the identification information starts to fluctuate is emphasized, and the player feels that the progress of the game is easy to understand and the game progresses smoothly.
In particular, the player will be more aware of the display (effect) in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information starts to change due to a different effect from the first embodiment described above. The start of fluctuation can be effectively produced.
Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the start time of variation of the identification information is emphasized, so that the progress of the game can be made clear and smooth, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, from the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(b),
The inventive concept of effect control until completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 34(e) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing when the identification information starts to fluctuate, an effect is started for the first component to shift from being displayed on the display means to being hidden,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, a special character is added to the character portion, and the character portion is taken away from the screen by the special character and disappears to become a non-display state, and the number portion (second configuration) Element) is controlled to continue display, and the variable display game is controlled so that there is a first period in which the effect is performed until the character portion is completely hidden. game machine.

(B) Effect at the Time of Reach Next, a specific example of the effect at the time of the reach of the identification information of Modification 2 will be described.
Here, as other game effects, a second period (identification information At the start of ready-to-win, an effect is performed such that there is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information.
FIGS. 35(a) to (f) are diagrams showing how the effects change from when the identification information is reached in the special figure variation display game.
Specifically, FIG. 35(a) shows the state at the time of reach of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. The reach time here includes both when the identification information develops into a reach performance and when it becomes a super reach in the special figure fluctuation display game, and this timing corresponds to the second timing.

In the ready-to-win effect, after passing through the effect shown in FIG. 34(f), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 35(a).
In FIG. 35(a), the robot-like character on the left has completed a temporary stop, and the number portion "
3” is displayed, the robot-like character on the right also completes a temporary stop,
A state in which "3" in the number portion is displayed is shown. At this time, both the character and number portions of the middle pattern are continuing to change. Therefore, it becomes a ready-to-win state with the symbols "3", "3".
In addition, as for the state of the fluctuation of the above middle pattern, the medium pattern fluctuates at a relatively low speed (because it is normal reach), and it is clearly visible that the middle pattern is also fluctuating, so it is displayed with a dark black arrow. there is
In the above effect, the left and right symbols during the temporary stop do not sway, but this is not the only option.
In this way, as shown in FIG. 35(a), when the identification information reaches the screen of the display device 41, both the left and right identification information are character portions imitating a robot (first component),
A combination of "3" as the number portion (second component) is displayed to create an effect that reach has occurred.
Since reach has occurred, the player will watch the progress of the game with a sense of anticipation for the big win.

Next, the process shifts to the production shown in FIG. 35(b), and the left and right patterns of the character imitating a robot, which is the character part (first component), and the number part (second component) of the middle pattern during rotation. An eye-catching 1 as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to overlap all of them, and the character part (first component) and the number part (second component) are instantly hidden.
Here, an image of a rocket flying in a large star is displayed as eye catch 1 as a predetermined image.
The second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (the second component). An effect is performed to indicate that the number portion is changing at high speed (the same applies to the other eye-catching 3 and eye-catching 4 effects).

Here, the image of the eye catch 1 is displayed on either the front side or the rear side of the display device 41. When it is displayed on the front side, the character portion (first component) and the number of the identification information are displayed. Both parts (second components) are covered with the eye catch 1 image and are invisible to the player.
In the production described above, since the image of the eye catch 1 is displayed on the front side of the display device 41,
The character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) are instantly hidden.
Note that the rendering period of FIG. 35(b) is, for example, about 0.5 seconds.
Next, the screen of FIG. 35(c) is displayed, and all of the left and right patterns of the character modeled after the robot, which is the character portion (first component), and the number portion of the rotating middle pattern (second component) are displayed. An eye-catching 3 as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to be superimposed, and an effect is performed in which the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) are instantly hidden.
As eye catch 3 as a predetermined image, an image of two rockets flying in a large star is displayed here.

35(d), the character imitating the robot on the left side disappears and the numeral "3" is stopped and displayed, and the robot on the right side is displayed. A state is shown in which the character disappears and the number "3" is stopped and displayed. At this time, both the character and number portions of the medium pattern continue to fluctuate, and the thick black arrow indicates that the medium pattern is fluctuating at high speed. Therefore, even if the effects of eye-catching 1 and eye-catching 3 as predetermined images are performed, even if the character part is completely hidden from the player, the current reach state is "3". There is an advantage that the symbol "3" clearly indicates the reach state.
Next, the screen moves to the screen of FIG.
3” and an eye-catching 4 as a predetermined image so as to overlap all medium patterns during high-speed fluctuation.
is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) are instantly hidden.
As an eye catcher 4 as a predetermined image, an image of three rockets flying in a large star is displayed here.
As a result, it is convenient for the player to see the appearance of the rocket flying through the big stars, and the appearance of the rocket appearing three times gives the player a sense of power, and heightens the expectation of a big win.

Next, the screen moves to the screen of FIG. 35(f), and an effect that develops into SP reach, that is, super reach is performed. It should be noted that when the Super Reach pattern appears (at the moment when the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 35(f)), the effect of displaying the eye-catching 4 as the predetermined image on the screen ends.
In Super Reach, an effect (battle effect) for determining whether or not it is a big hit is started. At this time, a character imitating a robot (here, a robot character corresponding to "3") appears on the screen, and "3" is also displayed as a number portion (second constituent element), and "3" leads to a big hit. A production that creates a sense of anticipation will be performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit is represented by five star marks, and in the example of FIG. is the second highest.
At this point, hiding the character portion is completed. After that, the special figure variation display game is either a big hit or a loss.
It should be noted that the time from the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) with the appearance of the eye catch 1 shown in FIG. The time to complete the non-display effect of the part (first component) is about 3 seconds. However, it is not limited to 3 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.

In this way, when it develops into a reach performance of identification information or when it becomes a super reach (second
At the timing), a pattern of a character imitating a robot, which is the character part (first component), is displayed on the screen, and a pattern of "3" is also displayed as a number part (second component). , suddenly an eye-catching 1 as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen, and instantly the character part (first component) and the number part (second component) are hidden. After that, an eye-catching 3 as a predetermined image of another image for the second time is displayed on the screen, and the character part (first component) and the number part (
The effect of hiding the second component) is continuously performed, and after that, after displaying that the reach of "3" is once displayed, the eye catch 4 of another image is displayed again on the screen for the third time. Similarly, the effect of hiding the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) is continuously performed.

Therefore, since the effect of displaying the eye-catching as the predetermined image on the screen is performed three times in total, the effect of hiding the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second component) is even more pronounced. It can be emphasized and have a great impact on the player. In addition, since the eye-catching effect is performed three times, the super reach or the reach is remarkably emphasized.
In particular, from the player's point of view, by seeing the state in which the character part is completely hidden by the three eye-catching display effects, the development of the reach effect of the identification information and the super reach are remarkably achieved. It will be emphasized, and it will be felt that it is easy to understand and the progress of the game is smooth.

Next, from the start of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 35(b),
The inventive concept of the effect control from the effect shown in FIG. 35(e), which is the third eye-catching display effect, to the completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 35(f) is as follows. It is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing, which is the start of reach of the identification information, an effect for transitioning from the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to the non-display is started,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, an eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap the character portion (first component), and at least the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden, After that, an eye-catch is displayed as another predetermined image for the second time, and the production continues such that at least the character portion (the first component) is hidden. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that an eye-catching as another predetermined image for a second time is displayed and at least a character portion (first component) is not displayed.

Hereinafter, as a second embodiment of the present invention, an example of a form applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine 10 of Example 2 is configured to perform the following control in addition to the configuration for performing the above control (Example 1).
In addition, in the description of the second embodiment, since the hardware configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the same numbers are used for description.
(A) That is, the production control device 300 controls the display device 41 to variably display the identification information. A first effect period for executing an effect for the identification information (for example, an effect such as the character rotating and fluctuating) at the time when the identification information starts to change (first timing), and a character part (first component ) is not displayed (character part of identification information (first
Control is performed so that there is a non-display transition effect period) from display to non-display of the component).
The first period is a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information. , the expression "non-display effect period" is also used as appropriate. Moreover, in the description regarding the effect, the expression "non-display effect" is also used. For example, for the start and end of the first period, the expressions "start of non-display effect" and "end of non-display effect" are also used.

Such control may be performed by setting the first period to be a period in which it can be recognized that the character portion (first component) has completely disappeared.
In this case, when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), for example, only the character portion (first component) rotates and the character portion is hidden, and a decorative effect is performed in which stars flow in the screen to hide part of the pattern (character part and number part), and then overlap with the pattern (character part and number part) Control is performed to display a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching image) on the screen of the display device 41 to cover up stars and patterns (character portions and number portions).
From the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), the control up to this point is the effect of the first effect period in which the control of the effect for the identification information is executed.

Next, as described above, a predetermined image (
For example, after an eye catcher is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the character portion (first component) becomes a slightly rotating rod shape, and the character portion (first component) is completely hidden. Control of production to be in the state is performed. The control from the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing) to this point is the control in the first period.
In general, the term "character" refers to a character or personality, or a character who has a character or personality,
It means an animated person, animal, etc.

(B) In addition, the production control device 300 is configured to include a character part (first component) and a number part (second component) as another control, and when the identification information develops into a reach production When it becomes super reach (second timing), a second production period for executing a production that foretells the progress of the game (for example, a notice production or a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit), and a character part (first configuration element) is not displayed (non-display transition rendering period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information).
It should be noted that such control may be performed by setting the second period to be a period in which it can be recognized that the character portion (first component) has completely disappeared.
In this case, when the identification information develops into a ready-to-win effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), the character part (first component) is changed to a non-display effect. ) is rotated so that it cannot be seen with the character and is hidden. The control up to this point is the control for the second period in which the character portion (first component) is hidden.
Also, as the control of the second effect period for executing the effect for the identification information, a large number of groups (for example, A large number of small tiger characters are collected to form a group) appears on the screen, and control is performed for the production of a group notice that flows across the screen from the right side to the left side in a flock.
At the time when the character portion (first component) is completely hidden, the effect control of the group announcement is also terminated. The control up to this point is the second
It becomes the control of the production period.

Next, the screen shifts to a super ready-to-win screen, and an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining or suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is started on the shifted screen. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit is represented by a five-star mark. An effect control is performed to inform the player that
At this time point, the second effect period for executing the effect for notifying the progress of the game ends. After that, it either hits the jackpot or loses.
In the above description, the first effect period is shorter than the first period, and the second effect period is longer than the second period. Not limited to this, the first rendering period may be longer than the first period, the second rendering period may be shorter than the second period, or both periods may be the same, depending on the game situation. properly set.
A specific example of the above control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29 and later.

Here, the inventive concept of the above (A) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, a first
A gaming machine, wherein the variable display game is controlled such that there is an effect period and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means.
The inventive concept of (B) above is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
In the second timing of the variable display game, there are a second effect period during which the effect for notifying the progress of the game is executed and a second period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game.

In addition, the inventive concept combining the above (A) and (B) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, a first
Controlling the variable display game so that there is a performance period and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
A second effect period for executing an effect that foretells the progress of the game at the second timing;
A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display game is controlled such that there is a second period during which the first component is hidden on display means.
Here, the effect control device 300 corresponds to effect control means for controlling the display device 41 (effect display means), and the display device 41 corresponds to effect display means. The control device 300 has the function of control means for controlling the display device 41, and the display device 41 has the function of display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information.
In addition, the special figure variation display game of the present embodiment (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished) corresponds to the variation display game of the concept of the invention.

<Overview of the game of Example 2>
In Example 2, the following special figure variation display game is performed.
That is, a first effect period for executing a production for the identification information (for example, a production such as a character rotating and fluctuating) at the start of the variation of the identification information in the special figure fluctuation display game (first timing), and a character part (first component) is not displayed (non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information).
Specifically, when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), for example, only the character portion (first component) rotates and the relevant While the character part is hidden, a decorative effect is performed in which stars flow in the screen to hide part of the pattern (character part and number part), and then overlap with the pattern (character part and number part). A predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching image) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 to cover the stars and patterns (character portions and number portions). From the time when the identification information starts to change (first timing), the control up to this point is the first effect period in which the control of the effect for the identification information is executed.

Next, as described above, a predetermined image (
For example, after an eye catcher is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the character portion (the first component) becomes a rotating rod-like shape, and the character portion (the first component) is completely hidden. At the same time, the number part as the second component is displayed on the screen such as "3", "4", "5" so that it can be recognized on the screen.
The control from the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing) to this point is the control in the first period.
In this case, the predetermined image (for example, eye-catching) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as described above at the time when the identification information starts to change (first timing) when the non-display of the character portion (first component) starts. The point of time until the character part (the first component) is hidden is the point of time until the character part (the first component) is hidden, which corresponds to the first period.

As described above, when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), as control of the first effect period for executing the effect for the identification information, for example, the pattern (character part or number part) is all overlapped. An effect is performed in which an eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 and the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden. When overlapping, the character part (first component)
A control is performed to superimpose the image on either the front side or the rear side of the image.
For example, it is preferable to hide the character portion while the eye-catching image is superimposed on the front side to hide the character portion. Control may be performed to produce an effect that makes the displayed state difficult to see.

Further, at the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), the character portion (the first component) becomes a rotating bar shape as described above at the time of the start of the first effect period in which the effect for the identification information is executed, The point in time when the effect in which the character portion (first component) is completely hidden is the end point of the first effect period in which the effect for the identification information is executed.
As a result, there are a first rendering period during which the rendering for the identification information is executed and a first period which is a non-display transition rendering period during which the character portion (first component) is displayed and then hidden. Emphasizes the start of fluctuations.
Next, as described above, the character part (first component) is completely hidden, and then the number part as the second component is recognizable on the screen, for example, "3", "
After the effect of displaying on the screen such as 4' and '5' is performed, the number portion as the second component fluctuates at high speed. After that, it will be a production of either a miss or a development to reach.

In addition, as other games, when the identification information develops into a ready-to-win effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), an effect that foretells the progress of the game (for example, a notice effect or an expectation-suggesting effect for a big hit ) and a second period during which the character part (first component) is hidden (non-display transition from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information A performance is performed in which a performance period) exists.
In this case, when the identification information develops into a ready-to-win effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), as a control of the second effect period for executing the effect for the identification information, for example, the character portion (first component) Rotates and becomes invisible as a character and begins to disappear, and as a so-called group announcement, a large number of groups (for example, a group of smaller tiger characters) appear on the screen. A production that flows across the screen from the right side to the left side in a crowd is performed. At this time, a plurality of presentations, that is, the rotation of the character portion (first component) and the presentation of the group announcement are performed in an overlapping manner, and the pattern of the character portion (first component) rotates at high speed and completely disappears from the screen. to be displayed. The effect up to this point is the game in the second period in which the character portion (first component) is hidden.

Next, the screen shifts to a super ready-to-win screen, and an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining or suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is started on the shifted screen. At this time point, the second effect period for executing the effect for notifying the progress of the game ends. After that, it either hits the jackpot or loses.
In this way, at the start of ready-to-win, a large number of groups of characters appear on the screen as a group notice, etc., to make a notice effect or to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the character portion (first component). By executing both of the hidden effects, the reach effect and the super reach will be emphasized.
A specific example of the above game will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36 and later.

Next, a specific rendering operation of Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39. FIG.
In the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 effects the display device 41 to variably display the identification information. Directing for (for example, star flowing pattern (character part and number part)
1st production period for executing the production that hides part of the character part (first component)
is hidden (the non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information). (See (A) effect at the start of fluctuation described later).
In addition, as other games, when the identification information develops into a ready-to-win effect or when it becomes a super reach (second timing), an effect that foretells the progress of the game (for example, a notice effect or an expectation-suggesting effect for a big hit ) and a second period during which the character part (first component) is hidden (non-display transition from display to non-display of the character part (first component) of the identification information A specific effect will also be described (see (B) Reach time effect described later).
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the following effects of the special figure variation display game are performed for the special figure variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished). .
The special figure variation display game here refers to a variation display game on the display device 41, that is, a decoration special figure variation display game.

(A) Effect at the Start of Variation FIG. 36 is a diagram showing how the effect changes from the start of variation of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. 36A to 36E show effects displayed on the screen of the display device 41. FIG.
Here, on the screen of FIG. 36(a), the display device 41, the first decoration game display section 81, the first starting memory number display section 85a, the second starting memory number display section 85b, the second A decorative game display portion 82, a standby memory display portion 83, and an active memory display portion 84 are shown. These functions are as described in the configuration of the game machine 10. FIG. Moreover, since it becomes complicated, FIG. 29 and FIG.
1 omits matching.
In FIG. 36, FIG. 36(a) shows when the variation of the identification information stops in the special figure variation display game (
immediately before the first timing), the identification information at that time is shown. In this case, on the screen of the display device 41, a character portion (first component) is displayed, and a number portion (second component) is displayed in combination with each character portion.
Specifically, the characters are displayed in a row on the screen in the order of "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro" from the left side, and "3" is displayed as the number part (second component). "4",
"5" is displayed in combination with these "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro".
Therefore, they are combined in the form of "Torasuke"+"3", "Tiger Rock"+"4", and "Tiger Taro"+"5", and are displayed as static patterns.
Note that the screen of FIG. 36(a) shows the state immediately before the identification information starts to fluctuate.

Here, in the screen of FIG. 36(a), a character portion (first component) and a number portion (second component) are displayed in the first decoration game display portion 81. FIG. Then, the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) = 1 is displayed in the first starting memory number display part 85a, and the second starting memory number (special figure 1 number) is displayed in the second starting memory number display part 85b 2 pending number), "0" is displayed.
The second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (second component), and here the number "345" is displayed. Furthermore, the standby storage display section 83 displays the current standby storage.
, only one image of a small round ball is illuminated. The memory-in-execution display section 84 shows how the variable start game is to be executed. In this scene, the memory-in-standby=1, so that the identification information starts to change in accordance with the situation. It is illuminated to indicate
After that, similarly, after the identification information starts to change, the display effects including numerical representation, lighting, etc. of each of the above-described display units are performed according to the game state at that time.

Next, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 36(b), which is the effect at the start of variation of the identification information (first timing). In this case, only the character parts "Torasuke", "Tora Rock", and "Tora Taro" are action (for example, each part is individually centered around the character part (the so-called vertical axis of the character part)). Axis rotation) is started, and the effect is to hide the character part. At this time, only the character part (first component) rotates with the action, and the character part gradually disappears, and the stars flow in the screen and part of the pattern (character part and number part) (especially the center) A decorative effect is performed to hide the character part of
Here, the decorative effect in which stars flow in the screen and hide a part (especially the central character part) of the (character part and number part) is the effect of the first effect period in which the effect for the identification information is executed. Equivalent.
It should be noted that the point in time when the effect shown in FIG. 36(b) is shifted corresponds to the first timing at which the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) is started.

Also, the point of time when the effect shown in FIG. 36(b) is shifted corresponds to the start timing of the first effect period in which the effect corresponding to the identification information is executed.
On the other hand, "3", "4", and "5" as numeral portions (second components) do not rotate and remain stationary. Then, the character part starts to rotate, and then after that, as shown in FIG.
As shown in c), a predetermined image (for example,
Eye catch) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 to cover the character portion and the number portion (the effect shown in FIG. 36(c)).
In the scene of 9(b), only the character portion rotates, showing an effect in the middle of disappearing.
It should be noted that not only the character portion but also the entire pattern including the character portion and the number portion may be rotated.
36(b), the second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (second component). In the 2-decoration game display section 82, an arrow is displayed to indicate that the number part is changing. On the other hand, the first start memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) is displayed in the first start memory number display section 85a
is displayed, but since the identification information has started to change based on the first starting memory number, the first starting memory number disappears and "0" is displayed in the first starting memory number display section 85a.
Furthermore, the standby storage display section 83 displays the current standby storage, which is shown in FIG.
Since the identification information started to change in the production of b), the image of the small round ball in the standby memory display section 83 disappears and moves to the memory display section 84 during execution. An image of a round ball is displayed to indicate that the variable start game is about to be executed. It should be noted that the first starting memory number display section 85a and the second decorative game display section 8 are also used in the subsequent effects.
2. The display of the in-execution memory display section 84 is the same as shown in FIGS. 36(c) to (e).

36(c), a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching image) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so as to overlap the pattern (character portion or number portion), and a star or pattern (character portion or number portion) is displayed. A production that covers the number part) is performed. Since the predetermined image (eye-catching) here is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. invisible to the player.
In addition, in the production of FIG. 36(b), "3", "4", "
5” does not rotate and remains stationary, only the character portion (first component) rotates and the character portion gradually disappears, but on this screen (that is, on the screen) A predetermined image (eye-catching) is displayed on the display device 41 so as to be superimposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined image (eye-catching) is displayed on the front side of the screen of the display device 41, and the number portion (second component) and the rotating character portion (first component) are displayed on the back side. It is a production of a layered structure screen.

On the back side of the eye-catching screen, the design (character portion and number portion) and the effect of flowing stars are being executed, and even when the effect in FIG. continues, but the effect of the falling stars ends and the effect of displaying a predetermined image (eye-catching) on the screen of the display device 41 also ends. From the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), the control up to this point is the first effect period in which the control of the effect for the identification information is executed. That is, when the effect of FIG. This corresponds to the end timing of the first effect period in which the effect corresponding to the identification information is executed. Therefore, the first effect period during which the effect for the identification information (for example, the effect of hiding a part of the pattern (character part or number part) with falling stars) starts from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 36(b). 36(c), and ends when the effect shown in FIG. 36(c) ends. The rendering time of the first rendering period is about 0.5 seconds.
When the effect of displaying the predetermined image (eye-catching) shown in FIG. 36(c) on the screen of the display device 41 is completed, then, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the effect continues from the effect of FIG. 36(c). The character part of the pattern shown in the figure continues to rotate as a bar, but since the bar is simply rotating, the player does not recognize it as a character part and sees only three thick bar-like lines. Gone. Then, the character portion becomes completely invisible after becoming bar-shaped. Therefore, the character portion is rendered in a completely non-display state.
After that, the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 36(e), and "3" and "
The patterns of 4 and 5 start to fluctuate at high speed and cannot be recognized as numbers.

On the other hand, even in the screen of FIG. 36(d), "3", "
4' and '5' do not rotate and remain stationary and are recognized by the player.
Then, when the screen of FIG. 36(d) ends, the character portion (first component) is completely hidden. Equivalent. Therefore, the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) starts at the start of the effect shown in FIG. 36(b) and ends at the end of the effect shown in FIG. 36(d). corresponds to the period. The performance time of the first period is about 1 second. However, it is not limited to one second, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.
In the production of FIG. 36(e), "3", "4", "5" as the number part (second component)
starts to fluctuate at high speed, and the numerals "3", "4", and "5" fluctuate at such high speed that the numbers cannot be discerned. It is shown in the pattern.
The second decoration game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (the second component). There is an effect to display that the number part is changing at high speed.
After that, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is either off or it develops to reach production.

FIG. 37 is timing for explaining the change of the character part (first component) from display to non-display and the change in the effect for the identification information at the start of the change of the identification information in the special figure fluctuation display game (first timing). Chart.
As shown in FIG. 37A, the character portion (first component) is displayed at the start of variation of the identification information (first timing), and the character portion (first component) is displayed at the start of variation (first timing). 1 component) becomes non-display.
When the identification information starts to change (first timing), the character part (first component) starts to rotate on its axis individually, and the character part gradually disappears, and at the end of the first period The character portion (first component) is completely hidden. Therefore, the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(A) shows that the display level of the character portion (first component) decreases linearly in an almost oblique manner, and finally completely disappears.
Further, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the character portion (the first
When the component elements) are rotating on their own axes, the stars flow across the screen, creating a decorative effect that hides part of the design (characters and numbers) (especially the central character). Since the period during which this star shines is a certain period of time from the start of the first period, the effect is executed (that is, the display state) for a certain period of time from the start of the fluctuation of the identification information. The timing chart shows the state of execution.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37(B), after a short period of time from the start of identification information fluctuation (first timing), the character portion (first component) individually starts rotating on its axis, and the screen changes. Although an effect is performed in which stars flow through the screen of the display device 41, after a short time from the start of the change of the identification information, an eye-catching predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 so that the character portion (first component) is completely overlapped. is displayed for a predetermined time, the character portion (first component) is instantly hidden, and the player cannot see the effect of the stars flowing in the screen.
Therefore, FIG. 37(B) shows a state in which an eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed for a predetermined time. At this time, when the eye catch is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the eye catch is displayed on the front side of the screen during that period.
component) appears to be hidden when viewed on the screen. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37A, the character portion (the first component) is kept hidden only during the eye-catching period.
According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
rotates, and the stars flow on the screen, but the eye-catching as a predetermined image is displayed in front of the design and stars, so when the eye-catching is displayed, the design and star effects are no longer visible. , gives an impact to the player.
Also, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, the display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information gradually fades, making it easier for the player to see how the character portion (first component) disappears. There are advantages.

Next, the effect of the performance at the start of fluctuation shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 will be described.
First, the effect of the first effect period in which the effect for the identification information is performed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 36(b), the effect for the identification information in the first effect period is, as shown in FIG. While the numbers are recognizable, the character part (first component) rotates and the character part gradually disappears, and the stars flow in the screen and part of the pattern (especially the central character A decorative effect that hides the part) is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching image) appears on the entire screen to cover the stars and patterns (character portions and number portions).
As described above, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, decorations are made such that a part of the pattern (especially the character part in the center) is hidden by falling stars. can be made, emphasizing the start of variation of the identification information, making it easy for the player to understand, and making the player feel that the progress of the game is smooth. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the effect of the first period in which the non-display effect is performed from the display to the non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information will be described.
As shown in FIG. 36(b), when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), the characters "Torasuke", "Tiger Rock", and "Tiger Taro" are rotated and displayed on the screen. gradually disappears and becomes invisible, and at this time, the number part (second component) "3", "4", "
5” is displayed in a recognizable manner on the screen, the player sees the state where the character portion gradually disappears, thereby emphasizing the time when the identification information starts to fluctuate.
It is easy to understand, and you will feel that the progress of the game is smooth.
After that, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a predetermined image (for example, an eye-catching image) is displayed on the entire screen to cover the pattern (character portion and number portion), and the character portion is completely hidden. hidden in
Therefore, since the player is more aware of the display (effect) in which the character portion is completely hidden when the identification information starts to change, it is possible to make the identification information change start effective from this point of view as well. can.
In addition, in the special figure variation display game, by performing an effect that hides the character part with a predetermined image (eye-catching) at the start of the variation of the identification information, the time of the variation start will be emphasized, so that the game progresses. It can be made clear and smooth, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

By the way, in the past, although the character design was sometimes hidden during the progress of the game,
In many cases, it is simply hidden and has no relation to the progress of the game before or after the display. It was difficult for the player to understand how the game progressed, and it could not be said that the progress of the game was smooth.
Further, conventionally, it was not possible to say that the effect of hiding the character pattern was effective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, a decorative effect is performed such that a part of the pattern (especially the central character part) is hidden by a star flowing, and then a predetermined image (for example, an eye Catch) is displayed on the entire screen to cover the design (characters and numbers), after which the design (numbers) shifts to high-speed fluctuations, giving a novel and impactful impression when the identification information starts to change. By emphasizing the start of the variation of the identification information, the player can feel that the game progresses smoothly.
In addition, from the viewpoint of relevance to the progress of the game, in the present embodiment, when the identification information starts to change, a decorative effect is performed such that a part of the pattern (especially the character part in the center) is hidden by falling stars.
It is possible to have a relationship with the progress of the game before and after. A decorative effect is performed, and then a predetermined image (for example, eye-catching) is displayed on the entire screen to cover the pattern (character part or number part). It is possible to make the player firmly recognize that it is, to make it easy for the player to understand that the intention is to emphasize the start time of the fluctuation of the identification information, and to make the player recognize that the game progresses smoothly. , can enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the inventive concept of the effect control shown in FIG. 36 is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, at a first timing of the game, a first effect and a second effect for hiding the first component on display means are performed.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.
Next, the inventive concept of production control with a slightly more limited configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
The game is controlled such that, at the first timing of the game, there is a first effect period for executing the first effect and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means. Characteristic game machine.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.

Next, the inventive concept of effect control with a more limited effect is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, a first
A gaming machine, wherein the variable display game is controlled such that there is an effect period and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a further limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, a first
performance period and
At the first timing of the variable display game, an effect for shifting the first component from the state displayed on the display means to non-display is started, and the effect is performed until the non-display is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display game is controlled so that the first period exists.

Here, when the identification information starts to change in the special figure change display game, the character part (the first
It corresponds to the first timing at which the non-display effect of the component) is started, and also corresponds to the first timing at which the first effect period for executing the effect for the identification information is started.
The first period is a concept of a period from a state in which the character portion (first component) of the identification information is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed when the identification information starts to fluctuate.
During the period, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, the character part (first component) of the identification information is displayed to change to non-display, and until the non-display is completed. It is also a period, and in terms of production. The first period can also be said to be a non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information when the identification information starts to fluctuate. In the first period, the timing when the identification information starts to change (first timing) is the start timing of the first period, and the timing when the character portion (first component) disappears and the non-display is completed is the first period. end timing.

Also, the first effect period is a concept of a period from the state where the effect for the identification information is started when the identification information starts to change to the state where the effect is finished.
In the example of FIG. 29 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the identification information starts to fluctuate, stars flow within the screen of the display device 41 to hide part of the pattern (especially the central character part). 36(b) and FIG. 3
6(c) corresponds to the first presentation period.

Next, the inventive concept that limits the first timing is expressed as follows.
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display game is controlled such that the first timing of the variable display game is the start of variation of the identification information.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 36(b),
The inventive concept of effect control until completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 36(d) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing when the identification information starts to fluctuate, an effect is started to shift the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a state in which it is not displayed,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, only the character portion is rotated to a non-display state, and the number portion (second component) is controlled to continue to be displayed, and the non-display of the character portion is controlled. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display game is controlled so that there is a first period during which an effect is performed until a state of completion is reached.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 36(b),
The inventive concept of the effect control from the effect of covering with the eye-catching image of FIG. expressed.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing when the identification information starts to fluctuate, an effect is started to shift the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a state in which it is not displayed,
In the effect for transitioning to non-display, only the character part is rotated and gradually becomes non-display, and the number part (second component) is controlled so that the display continues.
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game so that a character portion is completely hidden after an eye-catching image as a predetermined image is displayed on the entire screen to cover the pattern. .

(B) Effect at the Time of Reach Next, a specific example of the effect at the time of reach of identification information will be described.
Here, as other game effects, the identification information is configured to include a character portion (first component) and a number portion (second component), and when the identification information develops into a ready-to-win effect or becomes a super reach. In (second timing), a second effect period for executing an effect that foretells the progress of the game (for example, a forewarning effect or an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit), and a character part (first component) is hidden. A second period (non-display transition effect period from display to non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information) is performed.
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing how the effect changes from when the identification information is reached in the special figure variation display game. 38A to 38D show effects displayed on the screen of the display device 41. FIG.

Specifically, FIG. 38(a) shows the state at the time of reach of the identification information in the special figure variation display game. The reach time here includes both when the identification information develops into a reach performance and when it becomes a super reach in the special figure variation display game, and this timing corresponds to the second timing.
As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the identification information is reached, the screen of the display device 41 displays the character part (first component) of "Torasuke" and the number part (second component) of "Torasuke". A combination of "3" is displayed, and it is an effect that a reach has occurred.
Since reach has occurred, the player will watch the progress of the game with a sense of anticipation for the big win.
The second decorative game display section 82 displays the current state of the number portion (the second component). An effect of displaying an arrow indicating that the number portion is being changed is performed. On the other hand, the first start memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) is displayed in the first start memory number display unit 85a, but since the reach variation of the identification information based on the first start memory number has started, the first The number of starting memories is lost, and the first
"0" is displayed in the starting memory number display section 85a. Even in the subsequent reach production, the first
The displays of the start memory number display section 85a, the second decorative game display section 82, and the memory display section 84 during execution are the same as shown in FIGS. 38(a) to (d).

In addition, in the state of reaching the identification information shown in FIG. 38(a), the screen of the display device 41 displays a suggestive display suggesting that some effect will be executed by two timers. When each of these timers times up is the timing at which some effect is executed. That is, since two timers are displayed (one is "preparing" indicating that the countdown has not started), it suggests that at least two effects will occur.
The screen of FIG. 38(a) indicates that a button effect has occurred when one timer has reached "0". At this time, when the "PUSH" button displayed at the center of the screen is pressed, the advance notice effect (group notice effect as the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38(a) and (b)) appears. It should be noted that the group notice may appear after a certain period of time has elapsed without pressing the "PUSH" button.
In addition, the other one of the two timer-activated displays displays "Ready" until the timer countdown rendition begins. Also, in the lower right corner of the screen "via zone"
A band image is displayed. This band image indicates that the game has reached the present through a zone in which the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and the player's expectation for a big win is increased. Become.
In addition, in the production of the band image "via zone", an effect is performed such that the characters "via zone" are scrolled. In other words, the effect is such that the characters "via zone" appear to the player as if they are scrolling through the band image, such as "via zone, via zone...".
Note that each of the above effects is performed before the start of the second period in which the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 38(b) is not displayed.

Next, the production shifts to FIG. 38(b), in which the two patterns of "Torasuke" of the character portion (first component) in the ready-to-reach state are pivotally rotated and gradually disappear from the screen and begin to disappear. is performed, and at this time, an effect is performed in which "3" of the two number portions (second component) is oscillated and displayed in a recognizable manner within the screen.
Also, on the screen of FIG. 38(b), as a so-called group notice, a large number of groups (for example, a large number of smaller tiger characters are collected to form a group) appear on the screen and move from the right side to the left side of the screen. The production that flows across is started.
Next, the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 38(c), and an effect is performed in which the above-mentioned advance notice of the group passes. from completely invisible. Also, at this time, a plurality of effects, that is, the two rotations of the character portion (first component) "Torasuke" and the effect of the group notice are performed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, the pattern of the character portion (first component) is completely hidden, and the effect of the group announcement is also terminated. The screen of FIG. 38(c) shows the state immediately before the end of the effect of the group announcement.
38(b) is the start timing of the second period in which the character portion (first component) is hidden, and the point in time when the effect in FIG. 31(c) ends is the character portion (first
component) is not displayed. This second period is on the order of one second.

Next, the screen shifts to the screen of FIG. 38(d), and an effect that develops into SP reach, that is, super reach is performed.
Here, a suggestive display is made suggesting that some kind of effect will be executed by the timer. A timer with a value of 30:00 (30 seconds) is shown in FIG.
An effect displayed at the left corner of the screen is performed as shown in (d).
This timer gives a timer notice suggesting that some effect will occur after a predetermined time. At the point of time in FIG. , and 30 seconds are displayed here. So it suggests that something happens 30 seconds after this timer starts counting down.
This timer may be incremented during the countdown. For example, it may be incremented by 10 seconds to make a total of 40 seconds, or may be incremented multiple times to be further extended. Also, the added value is not limited to one type, and the presentation does not necessarily occur after the time of the initial value has elapsed.

Now, in Super Reach, an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining or suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is started. In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit is displayed using five star marks, and in the example of FIG. is the second highest. The battle effect here is included in the effect of the second effect period in which the effect that foretells the progress of the game is executed.
When the effect shown in FIG. 38(d) ends, the second effect period for executing the effect that foretells the progress of the game ends. After that, the game result is either a big hit or a loss.
38(b) is the start timing of the second effect period for executing an effect that foretells the progress of the game, and the time when the effect of FIG. 38(d) ends is the end timing of the second effect period. becomes. This second effect period is about 3 seconds. However, it is not limited to 3 seconds, and may be changed depending on the content of the game.

In the above description, the first effect period is shorter than the first period, and the second effect period is longer than the second period. As a result, when the identification information starts to fluctuate, the first effect period during which the effect for the identification information is executed is shorter than the first period during which the first component of the identification information is not displayed on the display means. The progress of the game at the time of start of fluctuation becomes faster,
Players can also feel at ease.
On the other hand, when the identification information is reachable, the second effect period during which the effect for notifying the progress of the game is executed is longer than the second period during which the first constituent element of the identification information is not displayed on the display means. Since the performance and the performance suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win are sufficiently performed, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened while the game progresses smoothly.
Note that the setting of the period is not limited to the above, and the first rendering period may be longer than the first period, and the second rendering period may be shorter than the second period, or both periods may be the same. These are appropriately set according to the game situation.

FIG. 39 shows the timing for explaining the change in the character part (first component) from display to non-display and the change in the effect that foretells the progress of the game at the time of reaching the identification information (second timing) in the special figure fluctuation display game. Chart.
As shown in FIG. 39A, when the identification information is reached (second timing), for example, in the example of special reach, the pattern of "Torasuke" which is the character portion (first component) and the number portion (second timing). The combination of "3" as 2 components) is displayed, and the reach is produced, and when the identification information reaches (second timing), the character part (first
component) is the start timing of the second period until it is hidden.
When the reach time (second timing) of the identification information passes, the character part (first component)
starts to rotate on its own axis, the character part gradually disappears, and the character part (first component) disappears completely at the end timing of the second period. Therefore, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 39A, the display level of the character portion (first component) decreases linearly in an almost oblique direction, and finally, the character portion completely disappears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the character portion (the first
When the component elements) are individually rotating on the axis, a group notice appears on the screen and a production that flows across the screen from the right side to the left side begins, and this group notice is when the identification information reaches (Second timing), the pattern of the character part (first component) is completely hidden, and the effect of the group announcement is finished (not executed), so the state is shown in the timing chart. there is
In addition, when the group announcement appears on the screen and the effect is to flow across the screen from the right side to the left side, the front side of the character part (first component) (the front side as seen from the player) is moved to the group. The timing chart shows that the display level of the character portion (first component) is slightly lowered because the advance notice crosses and overlaps the character portion (first component) as shown in FIG. 39(A). there is

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the band image "Via Zone" indicates that the player has reached the present through a zone in which the expectation of a big win is high. However, this band image is in the display state from the time the identification information reaches (the start of the second timing), and continues until the production (for example, battle production) that determines or suggests whether or not it is a big hit. This is shown in the timing chart of FIG. 39(B). In addition, there is a slight decrease in the display level of the band image "via zone", for example, when a group notice appears on the screen and crosses the screen from the right side to the left side in a group, although it is slight This is because the group notice crosses the front side of the band image "via zone", and accordingly the display level is slightly lowered.
According to such a production, the character part (first component) after the start of reach of the identification information
rotates, and the character part in question gradually disappears, but in this scene, a group notice appears on the screen, and the expectation of a big hit is high. is displayed as a band image by the display of "via zone", it gives an impact to the player, making it easy for the player to understand, and the game progress can be made smooth.
In particular, since the band image "through the zone" is continuously displayed during the ready-to-win, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the big win is remarkably increased, and the interest in the game is improved.
In addition, since the display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information gradually fades when the identification information reaches, there is an advantage that it is easy for the player to understand how the character portion (first component) disappears. There is

Next, the effect of presentation when the identification information reaches the target shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 will be described.
First, the effect of the second effect period in which the effect for notifying the progress of the game is performed will be described.
In the effect for notifying the progress of the game in the second effect period, the character portion (first component) rotates when the identification information reaches, and the character portion gradually disappears, and the group notice appears on the screen. Furthermore, since the display of ``via zone'' indicating that the game state has entered a zone with a high expectation for a big win is displayed as a band image, it is possible to give an impact to the player, and the player wins a big win. There is an effect that the expectation for the game is increased and the amusement of the game is improved.
In addition, when the identification information is reached, the display of "preparing" and the fact that it has reached the present through the zone, which is a production state with high expectations for winning, is displayed on the screen as a band image with the display of "via zone". By performing a special effect of doing so, it is possible to greatly increase the player's expectations for a big win.
Next, the effect of the first period in which the non-display effect is performed from the display to the non-display of the character portion (first component) of the identification information will be described.
When the identification information is reached, the character part (first component) rotates and gradually disappears and begins to be hidden, and an effect in which the group notice crosses the screen is performed. When the character part (the first component) is completely hidden, the group announcement is also finished, so that the identification information reaches the target. By emphasizing the start time, the player can easily understand and feel that the game progresses smoothly. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, conventionally, there was a problem that it was difficult to recognize whether or not the pattern of the character disappeared when a plurality of effects overlapped at the timing of non-display during the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the identification information reaches, the character portion (the first component) rotates and gradually disappears and begins to disappear, and the effect that the group notice crosses the screen overlaps. Even if this is done, the character portion (the first component) is completely hidden and the performance of the group notice is also finished, so there is no problem that it is difficult to recognize whether the character pattern has disappeared as in the past. First, the complete non-display of the character portion (first component) is the same as the end of the effect of the group announcement, and there is an effect that the complete non-display of the character portion (first component) is easy to understand. In addition, the player can easily understand the game at the start of the reach of the identification information, and the player can feel that the game progresses smoothly. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Here, the inventive concept of the effect control shown in FIG. 38 is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
Controlling the game so that, at the second timing of the game, there is a second effect period for executing the second effect and a second period for hiding the first component on the display means. Characteristic game machine.
Here, the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 corresponds to display means, and the effect control device 300 corresponds to control means. The character portion displayed on the display device 41 corresponds to the first component, and the number portion corresponds to the second component.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a slightly more limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
In the second timing of the variable display game, there are a second effect period during which the effect for notifying the progress of the game is executed and a second period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game.
The concept of the invention may be modified as follows.
The control means includes means for executing the announcement effect,
The game machine is characterized in that the advance notice performance executing means executes a performance for foretelling the progress of the game in the second performance period.

Next, the inventive concept of production control with a further limited configuration is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
a second effect period for executing an effect that foretells the progress of the game at a second timing of the variable display game;
At the second timing, an effect for transitioning from the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to the non-display is started, and a second period in which the effect is performed until the state in which the non-display is completed is performed. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game as it exists.
The concept of the invention may be modified as follows.
The control means includes means for executing the announcement effect,
The game machine is characterized in that the advance notice performance executing means executes a performance for foretelling the progress of the game in the second performance period.

In addition, the inventive concept combining (A) the effect at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 36 and (B) the effect at the time of reach shown in FIG. 38 is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the variable display game, a first
Controlling the variable display game so that there is a performance period and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
A second effect period for executing an effect that foretells the progress of the game at the second timing;
A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display game is controlled such that there is a second period during which the first component is hidden on display means.
Here, the effect control device 300 corresponds to effect control means for controlling the display device 41 (effect display means), and the display device 41 corresponds to effect display means. The control device 300 has the function of control means for controlling the display device 41, and the display device 41 has the function of display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information.
The concept of the invention may be modified as follows.
The control means includes means for executing the announcement effect,
The game machine is characterized in that the advance notice performance executing means executes a performance for foretelling the progress of the game in the second performance period.

Next, the inventive concept that limits the second timing of the variable display game is expressed as follows.
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the second timing of the variable display game is controlled so that the variable display game is reached when the identification information is reached.

Next, from the start of the non-display rendering of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 38(b),
The inventive concept of effect control until completion of the non-display effect of the character portion (first component) shown in FIG. 38(c) is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing when the identification information reaches, an effect is started to shift the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a state in which it is not displayed,
In the production for transitioning to non-display, only the character part rotates to a non-display state, and a predetermined group notice appears on the screen and moves, and the non-display of the character part is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display game is controlled so that there is a second period in which an effect is performed until a state is reached.
The concept of the invention may be modified as follows.
The control means includes means for executing the announcement effect,
A game machine characterized in that the notice effect executing means executes an effect such as predicting the progress of the game by means of a effect in which a predetermined group notice appears on the screen and moves during the second period.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d), when the identification information is reached, a zone with a high expectation for a big hit is displayed on the screen with a display of "preparing" and a band image of "via zone". The inventive concept of the special effect control indicating that the game state has entered is expressed as follows.
a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information; and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing when the identification information reaches, an effect is started to shift the state in which the first component is displayed on the display means to a state in which it is not displayed,
At the second timing, there is a second effect period during which an effect that foretells the progress of the game is executed,
During the second performance period, at least a predetermined band image (for example, a band image "via zone") is displayed on the screen to perform a special performance indicating that the game state has entered a zone with high expectations for a big win. A gaming machine characterized by controlling a variable display game as follows.
The concept of the invention may be modified as follows.
The control means includes means for executing the announcement effect,
The notice effect executing means displays at least a predetermined band image (for example, a band image "via zone") on the screen during the second period to indicate that the gaming state has entered a zone with a high expectation for a big win. This game machine is characterized by executing a performance that foretells the progress of a game by performance.

In addition, in said production|presentation control, it is made into the following aspects about a period.
First, there are the following four periods.
・A first period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means at the first timing ・A second period during which the first component is not displayed on the display means at the second timing ・A first effect is executed at the first timing 1st effect period and 2nd effect is executed at the second timing. Performance control is in progress.
As a result, the first effect is performed for a short period of time when the identification information starts to fluctuate (first timing), so that the player can feel the rapid progress of the game when the identification information starts to fluctuate. In addition, since the first effect period is longer than the first effect at the start of the variation of the identification information (first timing), the player will receive a display (effect) in which the character portion is completely hidden at the start of the variation of the identification information. can be more recognized.
On the other hand, when the identification information reaches (second timing), the second period is shorter than the second effect period, so the player feels that the non-display effect period of the character part (first component) is short, and enjoys the reach game. Expectations can be transferred early, and the progress of the game can be felt smoothly.
Also, when the identification information is reached (second timing), the second effect period is longer than the second period, so the player can fully enjoy the game with a sense of anticipation for a big win when the identification information is reached. can.

Next, the above period may be controlled in the following manner.
A plurality of effects other than the first effect are possible for the effect executed during the first effect period.
In addition, a plurality of effects other than the second effect are possible for the effect executed during the second effect period,
For example, control may be performed such that the maximum number of effects to be executed is set to M.
In this case, the maximum number of effects N and M may be set so that M<N.
Alternatively, M>N may be set, or M=N may be set.
In consideration of various factors such as the model of the gaming machine, the content of the presentation, and the probability of big wins, it is preferable to set the settings that are considered to be optimal for the gaming machine.

The inventive concept when the identification information is at the start of fluctuation for the above period is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the first timing of the game, there are a first effect period for executing the first effect and a first period for hiding the first component on the display means,
Further, the effect executed during the first effect period can be a plurality of effects other than the first effect, and the game is controlled so that the maximum number of effects to be executed is N. Amusement machine.
In addition, the inventive concept when the identification information is reach time for the above period is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a game whose identification information is changed, and a control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information includes a first component and a second component,
The control means is
At the second timing of the game, there are a second effect period for executing the second effect and a second period for hiding the first component on the display means,
Furthermore, the effect executed during the second effect period can be a plurality of effects other than the second effect, and the game is controlled so that the maximum number of effects to be executed is N. Amusement machine.

Next, the scope of application of the invention described in the present application will be described.
(1) The gaming machine is not limited to the example of the embodiment, even if the game is played using game balls.
(2) In addition, the present invention is not limited to gaming machines using game balls, but can also be applied to so-called pachislot machines (rotary slot machine gaming machines) that play games using coins (or medals). can be done.
(3) Display devices such as decorative special display devices are not limited to display devices using liquid crystal, such as organic EL, cathode ray tube, dot LED, 7 segment LED, devices using bendable materials such as electronic paper. Any material can be used as long as it can be used to change the content.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims. Also, the configurations of the modifications and embodiments described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

10 game machine 30 game board 41 display device (effect display means, display means)
50 Collective display device 51 Special figure 1 indicator (first variable display means)
52 Special figure 2 indicator (second variable display means)
100 game control device (game control means, start storage means)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (effect control means, advance notice effect execution means, second notice effect execution means, control means)
311 Main control microcomputer 400 Power supply

Claims (1)

a first variable display means capable of variable display of the first variable display game;
a second variable display means capable of variable display of the second variable display game;
game control means for controlling the first variable display means and the second variable display means;
display means capable of displaying a decorative game that variably displays identification information corresponding to the first variable display game or the second variable display game;
A production control means for controlling the display means,
The identification information has a configuration including a first component and a second component,
The production control means is
performing a first effect and a second effect for hiding the first element on the display means at a first timing in the decoration game;
At a second timing after the first timing in the decoration game, performing a third effect for re-displaying the first component that has been hidden on the display means,
performing a fourth effect different from the second effect for hiding the first element on the display means at a third timing during reach after the second timing in the decoration game;
In the fourth effect, the identification information is made invisible with a first predetermined image covering the entirety of the identification information, and then the identification is made with a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image while maintaining the invisible state. covering the whole of information,
Next, after the identification information with the first component hidden is once made visible, the entire identification information is covered with a third predetermined image different from the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image, and the After making the identification information invisible again and hiding the third predetermined image, it is possible to develop the reach,
When executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means starts the variable display of the second variable display game, and the effect control means starts the variable display of the decoration game corresponding to the second variable display game.

Images